I2 Analyst's Notebook 7 User Guide - ISS Africa -Investigation ...

i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 

Customizing & Analyzing 

user guide

Copyright 

Copyright © 1991-2007 i2 Limited 

All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted by any means (electronic, 

mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise) without prior written permission from i2 Limited. i2 considers 

this software product information to be accurate, and reserves the right to modify it without notice. The software 

product described in this document is licensed for use under a software license agreement. 

Trademarks 

i2, the i2 logo and Analyst's Notebook are registered trademarks of i2 Limited. 

ChoicePoint is a registered trademark of ChoicePoint Asset Company. 

Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. 

Other products and services may be registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies and 

appear in this document for reference, and such reference is not intended to affect the authenticity of any 

trademark or service mark. 

Warning and Disclaimer 

i2 provides this document “as is”, without representation or warranty of any kind, express or implied, including 

without limitation any warranty concerning the accuracy, adequacy, or completeness of such information 

contained herein. i2 does not assume responsibility for the use or inability to use the software product as a result 

of providing this information. 

The data presented in this document is fictitious and for illustration purposes only with no connection to, without 

limitation, past or present persons, organizations, identifying numbers, or circumstances, except by coincidence. 

Version Information 

i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide: Customizing and Analyzing 

Version 7.0 

June 2007 

Part Number: 1312 

Addresses: 

i2 Limited, The Visual Space, Capital Park, Fulbourn, Cambridge CB21 5XH, UK 

Tel: +44 (0)1223 728600 Fax: +44 (0)1223 728601 

i2 Inc., 1430 Spring Hill Road, Suite 600, McLean, Virginia 22102, USA 

Tel: +1 703 921 0195 Fax: +1 703 842 4685

Contents 

About This Guide 7 

Getting Started 13 

Using the Documentation 14 

1: Defining Types 19 

Introduction 20 

Defining Entity Types 21 

Assigning Semantic Types 25 

Defining Link Types 31 

Defining Attribute Classes 38 

Assigning Property Semantic Types 44 

Adding Attribute Entries to Palettes 50 

Summary 54 

2: Creating Templates 55 


Creating a Template 57 

Defining the Grading System 65 

Defining Line Strengths 69 

Creating a Chart Using a Template 71 

Summary 75 

3: Creating a Template from a Chart 77 


Creating a Template from an Existing Chart 79 

Setting a New Grid Size 83 

Defining Date and Time Formats 85 

Specifying Default Entity and Link Styles 89 

i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide: Customizing & Analyzing 3

Contents 

Displaying the Time Bar 92 

Adding User Palettes 96 

Verifying Templates 101 

Sharing Templates 103 

Summary 105 

4: Customizing a Template 107 


Customizing an Existing Template 109 

Merging Templates 113 

Verifying a New Template 120 

Summary 121 

5: Showing and Hiding Information 123 


Introducing Selection Sets 125 

Showing and Hiding Chart Items 128 

Showing Attributes 129 

Changing the Size of an Icon 135 

Changing the Shading Color of an Icon 137 

Editing the Legend 140 

Preparing to Print a Chart 145 

Summary 154 

6: Using Background Items 155 


Using a Background Item as a Watermark 157 

Using Background Items 160 

Using Snapshots to Build Up a Presentation 164 

Summary 173 

7: Analyzing a Chart by Sorting Items 175 


About List Items 178 

Sorting Within a Table 193 

Analysis Attributes 198 

Copying Information from the List Items Dialog 202 

Sorting Theme Lines Within a Chart 204 

Summary 207 

4 i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide: Customizing & Analyzing

Contents 

8: Merging Charts 209 


Working with Label Merge and Paste Rules 211 

Working with Attribute Merge and Paste Rules 215 

Manually Merging Chart Items 220 

Merging Links 227 

Finding Matching Entities 236 

Combining Attributes 244 

Summary 247 

9: Basic Searching 249 


Using the Search Bar to Find Chart Items 252 

Using Visual Search to Find a Chart Item 256 

Finding a Path Between Two Entities on a Chart 259 

Finding Linked Chart Items 262 

Laying out a Chart 269 

Summary 273 

10: Searching Linked Entities 275 


Searching for Entity and Link Types 278 

Using Entity and Link Conditions in Visual Search 286 

Intersecting and Deleting Selection Sets 292 

Summary 296 

11: Temporal Analysis 297 


Performing Analysis Using Visual Search 299 

Laying Out Your Chart 306 

Creating Charts with Different Perspectives 316 

Summary 318 

12: Exploring Relationships 319 



Finding Paths Between Chart Items 327 

Summary 340 


Contents 

A: Features used in the Examples 341 

Analyst’s Notebook Features 342 

B: The i2 Semantic Approach 347 

Understanding the i2 Semantic Approach 348 

Semantic Capabilities of i2 Products 349 

Semantic Type Hierarchies 350 

What is Alignment? 354 

What are Custom Semantic Types? 358 

Semantic Types and Data Records 360 

Guidelines for Assigning Semantic Types 361 

Glossary 367 

Index 393 


About This Guide 

Intended audience 

License and installation 

Book structure 

This volume of the i2 Analyst’s Notebook User Guide introduces you to some of 

the analysis and presentation tools of Analyst’s Notebook. 

This guide is intended for users and administrators who have a basic knowledge of 

Analyst’s Notebook. If you are not familiar with Analyst’s Notebook, we 

recommend that you read the Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide: Creating Charts. 

This guide assumes that you have a licensed copy of Analyst’s Notebook installed 

on your computer. 

This guide contains the following chapters: 

Getting Started 

Describes how to use the documentation and explains how to work through the 

examples in this guide. 

Chapter 1, Defining Types 

Demonstrates how to define entity types, link types and attribute classes. It also 

explains how to add attribute entries to a palette. 

Chapter 2, Creating Templates 

Describes how to create a new template and define the grading system and line 

strengths. 



Chapter 3, Creating a Template from a Chart 

Describes how to create a template from an existing chart. It also describes how to 

define settings in the template, for example setting a new grid size, defining date 

and time formats, specifying default entity and link styles, displaying the time bar, 

and creating user templates. 

Chapter 4, Customizing a Template 

Explains how to remove unwanted entity types and palettes from a template. It also 

describes how to merge the contents of one template into another. 

Chapter 5, Showing and Hiding Information 

Introduces selection sets and explains how they can be used to mark a selection 

on a chart. It also demonstrates how to show and hide information on a chart, 

change the size of icons, and edit the chart legend. In addition to this, it shows how 

to prepare your chart for printing. 

Chapter 6, Using Background Items 

Demonstrates how to make a chart item into a background item to act as a 

watermark. It also describes how to create and present snapshots. 

Chapter 7, Analyzing a Chart by Sorting Items 

Explains how to analyze a chart using List Items and export data from List Items 

into another Windows application. It also demonstrates how to lay out your chart 

using a Theme Line layout. 

Chapter 8, Merging Charts 

Describes how to merge the contents of one chart into another. It explains how to 

prepare a chart for merging by introducing label and attribute merge and paste 

rules. It also shows how to merge chart items manually. 

Chapter 9, Basic Searching 

Introduces the search tools in Analyst’s Notebook: Find Text, Visual Search and 

Find Path, and explains how to use them to analyze a chart. 

Chapter 10, Searching Linked Entities 

Uses the Visual Search tool to perform analysis of an association chart. It also 

provides further information on handling selection sets. 


Conventions 

Chapter 11, Temporal Analysis 

Uses the Visual Search tool to perform analysis of a timeline chart. It also 

describes how to create charts with different perspectives. 

Chapter 12, Exploring Relationships 


Explains how to find linked chart items and a path between two entities on a chart. 

Appendix A, Features used in the Examples 

Contains tables listing where various Analyst’s Notebook features are 

demonstrated in the examples. These can be used to find the examples that best 

illustrate specific features. 

Appendix B, The i2 Semantic Approach 

Describes the concepts and principles that underpin the semantic functionality in 

i2 products with power2 built-in. It describes the main purpose of the i2 semantic 

approach, and concepts and guidelines that relate to the usage of the functionality. 

Glossary 

A glossary of terms to help you understand the terminology used within Analyst’s 

Notebook. 

Throughout this guide the following conventions are used: 

Style Used for Examples 

Bold Button names and options on 

dialogs. 

Initial Capitals Window names and dialog box 

names. 

Italic For emphasis, i2 product names 

and references to other i2 

manuals. 

Open command; File 

menu; Options button; 

Label check box. 

Tool window; Chart 

Properties dialog. 

Start Analyst’s Notebook. 

Courier User entered text. Type the name SMITH. 



Dates and 

times 

i2 services 

When entering dates and times, the format you use will depend on your computer’s 

settings. 

Dates throughout this guide are in the format dd MMM yyyy, for example 18 Oct 

2006. You should enter the date corresponding to your computer’s settings. 

Times in this guide are all in the 24 hour clock, for example, 13:00. If your 

computer’s settings are different then you should enter the time corresponding to 

your settings. For example 13:10 in the 24 hour clock equates to 1:10 PM. 

Unless otherwise stated, all of the charts used in these examples are in Greenwich 

Mean Time (GMT). 

Technical support is available to anyone whose organization has opted for our 

annual support program. If you have a question and cannot find a solution in the 

online help, you can send an e-mail to the i2 Technical Support team. 

For customers in North and South America, e-mail support@i2inc.com. 

For customers in the UK or the Rest of the World, e-mail support@i2.co.uk. 

Note: If your i2 software was purchased from one of our distributors, please contact your 

supplier for technical support. 

i2 International and Government Services Americas Consulting services work with 

customers to understand specific requirements and then determine the best 

methods to get these requirements met through custom development, on-site 

training, or alignment with the right system integrator or product vendor. 

For further information, contact your i2 supplier, or visit the i2 Web site at: 

www.i2group.com. 


Other i2 publications 

Analyst’s Notebook 7 

• i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 Quick Start Guide 

• i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide: Creating Charts 

• i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide: Importing 

Chart Reader 7 

• i2 ChartReader 7 User Guide 

• i2 ChartReader 7 Embedding in a Web Page 






This chapter introduces Analyst’s Notebook. It explains how to use the product 

documentation. 

Contents 

Using the Documentation 14 



Using the Documentation 0.1 

Product documentation 

We recommend that before you start to use the documentation provided with 

Analyst’s Notebook you familiarize yourself with the product by reading the 

Analyst’s Notebook 7 Quick Start Guide, which introduces the basic concepts of 

creating charts. 

The Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guides do not cover all of the features of the 

product. Instead, they comprise a series of worked examples to demonstrate how 

the features may be used in real situations. These guides are aimed at providing 

information about which features best suit different situations and how you might 

use them to approach specific problems. 

The online help covers all of the features of Analyst’s Notebook. It contains 

information on how to use the features. It also provides context-specific help for all 

of the fields and options in each of the dialogs. It does not include any worked 

examples as these are provided in the Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guides. 

The Analyst’s Notebook product documentation comprises: 

• i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 Quick Start Guide 

This is a short guide that introduces the basic concepts of Analyst’s Notebook. 

It is advisable to read this guide before you start to work through the examples 

in the different volumes of the Analyst’s Notebook User Guide. 

• i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide: Creating Charts 

The Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide comprises three volumes. This volume 

is devoted to producing charts manually. It provides the building blocks for 

understanding the fundamentals of Analyst’s Notebook and it would be 

beneficial for you to work through it regardless of whether you intend to create 

charts manually or import most of your data. 

• i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide: Importing 

This volume describes how to import data from text files, including how to 

create import specifications. 

• i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide: Customizing and Analyzing 

In this volume, you are introduced to more advanced features of the software. It 

describes how to create and maintain templates, including the ability to define 

new types and set other chart properties. This volume also covers the features 

that allow you to tidy up your chart for presentation purposes, and to learn all 

about the analysis tools available in Analyst’s Notebook. 


Using this guide 

• i2 Analyst’s Notebook Online Help 


For more information on using the online help, refer to Using the online help on 

page 17. 

The examples in this guide are designed to help you use Analyst’s Notebook in 

your work. In working through the examples, you will use many of the Analyst’s 

Notebook features. The examples will be most useful to you if you work through 

them in the order in which they appear in the guide. 

Structure of the examples 

The main chapters of this guide consist of a series of worked examples that 

introduce you to further features of Analyst’s Notebook. The examples can be split 

into three main areas: 

• Chapters 1 to 4 

Describe how to create and customize templates. 

• Chapters 5 - 6 

Describe how to use the presentation tools in Analyst’s Notebook and how you 

can use them to present charts. 

• Chapters 7 - 12 

Describe how you can analyze your charts using the analysis tools. 

In some examples, the first thing you are asked to do is open an existing chart that 

we have provided for you. To access these charts, double-click on the User Guide 

Example Material shortcut in the My Documents\i 2\i 2 Analyst’s 

Notebook 7 folder, and double-click on the User Guide - Customizing and 

Analyzing folder. 

We have also provided you with a set of finished charts that can be accessed from 

the folder location described above. The charts reflect how your initial charts 

should look once you have worked through and completed each example. You may 

want to refer to these while you are working through the examples or at the end of 

a completed section. 

Each example comprises several sections. The start of each section describes the 

concepts behind the feature that is being introduced. The remainder of each 

section consists of a series of steps.To complete a worked example you must 

follow each of these steps in order, without skipping any of the sections. 



If at a later date, you wish to work through an example without re-reading the 

conceptual information, just move from shaded heading to shaded heading in the 

chapter. Working through these headings will lead you through all of the steps in 

the example. 

Main section 

Shaded 

heading 

If at any time, you need more help with a feature, refer to the online help. How to 

use the online help is described on page 17. 

Storing the charts created in the worked examples 

Analyst’s Notebook saves charts to the My Documents\i2\i2 Analyst’s 

Notebook 7\Charts folder as standard. We recommend that you create a 

subfolder within this folder to store the charts you create with this guide. If you 

need to refer to them at a later date, it will be easy to find them. 

To create a subfolder in which to store your charts: 

1. Double-click on the My Documents shortcut on your Windows desktop, and 

navigate to the i2\i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7\Charts folder. 

2. Right-click in the My Documents window, and from the shortcut menu, select 

New ➧ Folder. 

3. Edit the name of this folder to be Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide - 

Customizing and Analyzing. 


Using the online help 


We recommend that you familiarize yourself with the Analyst’s Notebook online 

help and use it extensively in conjunction with this guide. 

Viewing the help 

You can view the Analyst’s Notebook online help in the following ways: 

• click the Help toolbar button 

• from the Help menu, select Contents 

• press the F1 key 

You can display a help topic about a specific item by: 

• clicking the What’s This? Help toolbar button, then clicking a menu command 

or toolbar button 

• holding your mouse over a toolbar button or menu command and pressing the 

F1 key to display help information relevant to the item you highlighted 

In dialogs, you can display a help topic about a specific item by: 

• clicking the Help button on a dialog to display information about that dialog 

• clicking the What’s This? Help button in the top right of the dialog and clicking 

on a dialog option 

• clicking with the left mouse button on a dialog option and pressing the F1 key 

Tooltips and the Status Bar 

To see the name of a toolbar button, hold the mouse over it. A pop-up hint, referred 

to as a tooltip, is displayed. 

Note also that Analyst’s Notebook displays a short description of the feature in the 

Status Bar, which is located along the bottom of the application. 

For further information on how to use the online help, refer to the online help topic 

Using Analyst’s Notebook Help. 




Defining Types 

1 

This example explains how you can define entity types, link types and attribute 

classes, and access them from palettes. 

Contents 


Defining Entity Types 21 

Assigning Semantic Types 25 

Defining Link Types 31 

Defining Attribute Classes 38 

Assigning Property Semantic Types 44 

Adding Attribute Entries to Palettes 50 

Summary 54 


Introduction 

Introduction 1.1 

Finished chart 

Scenario 

The features covered in detail in this example are: 

• creating entity types and adding them to palettes and charts 

• creating link types and adding them to palettes and charts 

• creating attribute classes and adding them to palettes and charts 

• assigning semantic types to entity and link types and attribute classes 

• using the Attribute Bar to add attribute instances to charts 

• creating attribute entries and adding them to palettes and charts 

If you need more information or help with using a specific feature, refer to the 

online help. How to access the online help is described in Using the online help on 

page 17. 

You can see the finished chart (Example 1 finished.anb) at any time while 

you are working through this example. To access the folder in which this chart is 

stored, double-click on the User Guide Example Material shortcut in the My 

Documents\i 2\i 2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 folder, and double-click on the 

User Guide - Customizing and Analyzing folder. 

You are part way through an investigation into the importation of drugs. You have 

already charted most of the happenings surrounding the investigation but new 

information has come to light about some of the suspects. 

Heroin, Cannabis and Cocaine are being imported into the country by unknown 

individuals. The drugs are being sent to known suppliers who are distributing them 

through their dealers. 

Records show that one of the suppliers, Jolene JOHNSON, has four previous 

convictions. Another supplier, Herbie PARKER, has been seen armed with a 

handgun. 

One of the dealers, Debbie CARTER, has a history of violence and has been seen 

armed with a shotgun. Records show that another dealer, Bob JAMES, also has a 

history of violence. Justin DRINKWATER has been the subject of surveillance for 

several months, and is also a known drug dealer. The last surveillance log that is 

available for him is dated 21 January 2006. 


Chapter 1: Defining Types 

Defining Entity Types 1.2 

Entities can represent, for example, individuals, locations, organizations or objects. 

When you start building your chart, you can select an entity type (such as Male, 

Female) from a palette or toolbar drop-down list, and drag it onto the chart. When 

you add it to the chart the entity type becomes an entity of the chosen type, for 

example: 

Anonymous 1 

Entity 

(on chart) 

Drag an gentity 

type 

from the palette 

and drop it onto 

the chart, 

it becomes an 

entity. 

Entity Type 

(in palette) 

You can define your own entity types and add them to palettes in a chart or when 

setting up a template. 

When defining a new entity type, you need to define the following properties: 

Icon The symbol used for the entity on the chart, when it 

is represented as an icon, theme line or event frame. 

Name The label displayed for the entity type in the palette. 

Line Color The color of the line or border used for an entity 

when it is represented as a box, circle, text block, 

event frame or theme line. 

Shade Color The dominant color of an icon for an entity on a 

chart when it is represented as an icon, an event 

frame or a theme line. 


Defining Entity Types 

Semantic Type The basic category of information used to classify 

the entity type, for example the Person semantic 

type which can be used to classify person-like entity 

types. For more information on semantic types, refer 

to How do I assign a semantic type to an entity 

type? on page 27. 

User Palettes The palette(s) on which the entity type will appear. 

An entity type is automatically added to the 

Standard palette but it can be added to as many 

other palettes as you wish. 

How do I define a new entity type? 

Jolene JOHNSON 

A chart already exists that has a Drugs entity type defined. However, you are 

interested in some more specific drug types. Define new entity types for the drug 

types Heroin, Cocaine and Cannabis. To do this: 

1. Open the chart Example 1 initial.anb. To access the folder in which this 

chart is stored, double-click on the User Guide Example Material shortcut in 

the My Documents\i 2\i 2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 folder, and doubleclick 

on the User Guide - Customizing and Analyzing folder. 

Dealer Dealer Dealer Dealer Dealer 

Dan BUXHAM Bob JAMES 

Sandra CASTE Debbie Carter 

2. Save the chart; from the File menu, select Save As. Click OK on the Cover 

Sheet dialog, to display the Save As dialog. Select the folder that you created to 

save your charts to on page 16. Type Example 1 defining types.anb in 

the File Name box and click Save. 

22 i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide: Customizing & Analyzing 

Dimitri ZANIER Herbie PARKER 

Justin DRINKWATER


3. From the Format menu, select Entity Types, to display the Entity Types page 

of the Chart Properties dialog: 

4. Click New. This displays the New Entity Type dialog: 


Defining Entity Types 

5. In the Name box type Heroin to define the name of the entity type. 

6. Click the Select Icon button in the Icon area to display the Choose Icon dialog: 

7. In the File Name box, type drugs and press the Enter key. This selects the 

drugs icon and closes the Choose Icon dialog. 

Do not close the New Entity Type dialog. 

When you created the Heroin entity type it was automatically added to the 

Standard palette. Add it to both the Commodities and Crime palettes. To do this, in 

the User Palettes area, turn on the Commodities and Crime check boxes: 

Leave the Shade Color as None and the Line Color as Black. 

Do not close the New Entity Type dialog. 



Assigning Semantic Types 1.3 

Categories of 

semantic type 

and the 

Library 

Semantic types provide an additional layer of meaning to the information that is 

stored in a chart. They help to categorize items which in the real world can be 

grouped together as having similar properties. For example, the Person semantic 

type is used to categorize all 'person-like' entity types such as Male, Female, 

Person, Police Officer, and so on: 

PERSON 

Male Female 

Person Police Officer 

The semantic type implies that there is a relationship between 'person-like' entities 

and that they are distinct from entities which depict cars and boats. It uses a 

common category to bind the entities together, enabling analysis and data 

alignment. 

Semantic types are important for two reasons: 

• they allow users to make use of semantic search and match capabilities 

• they allow charts created with the current version of Analyst’s Notebook to 

make use of any semantic analysis and data alignment capabilities offered in 

future versions 

You can assign semantic types to entity types, link types and attribute classes. 

When a user creates a chart item in Analyst’s Notebook, the associated semantic 

type is assigned automatically. When a chart is opened in Analyst’s Notebook, any 

semantic information enables users to make use of the semantic Visual Search, 

Search Bar, Find Matching Entities and List Items functionality. 

Semantic types are assigned from the Semantic Type Library. The Semantic Type 

Library has been developed by i2 for use with all of its products, ensuring that 

semantic types are used consistently. 

There are three categories of semantic type: 

• Entity semantic types - all entity types use these semantic types; for example, 

Person, Organization, Motor Vehicle, and so on. 

• Link semantic types - all link types use these semantic types; for example, 

Owner, Transactions, Telephone Call, and so on. 

• Property semantic types - all attribute classes use these semantic types; for 

example, Address, Telephone Number, Date of Birth, and so on. 


Assigning Semantic Types 

Each category of semantic type is grouped into a separate hierarchy within the 

Semantic Type Library. The hierarchy for entity semantic types is displayed below: 

The semantic type hierarchy enables you to assign semantic types that accurately 

reflect the entity type, link type or attribute class, while at the same time ensuring 

that it belongs to a wider group of semantic types. For example, when you assign 

the Meeting semantic type to an entity type, it will also belong to the groups Event 

(parent) and Entity (ancestor) through its semantic type. 

For more information about semantic types, see Appendix B, The i2 Semantic 

Approach. 


How do I assign a semantic type to an entity type? 


To be able to use the semantic searching and matching functionality, you want to 

assign semantic types to the entity type you have just created. Assign the Drug 

semantic type to the Heroin entity type. To do this: 

1. Click the Browse button in the Semantic Type area to display the Select 

Semantic Type dialog: 

The entity semantic type hierarchy is displayed as a navigation tree. 

2. In the Find box, type heroin. 

As you start to type, the Ordered Results list is updated with a potential match 

and the navigation tree is displayed at this match in the list: Drug. 

Notice that the Name, Synonyms, and Description boxes are updated with 

details about the selected semantic type. 

3. Select Drug and click OK to close the Select Semantic Type dialog. 

4. Click OK to close the New Entity Type dialog. 



In the Chart Properties dialog, you can see that the Drug semantic type has 

been assigned to the Heroin entity type. 

5. Click OK to close the Chart Properties dialog. 

6. Click the Save toolbar button to save your chart. 

How do I duplicate an entity type? 

You have defined an entity type for Heroin, but you know that Cocaine and 

Cannabis are also being imported into the country. Define an entity type for each of 

them. Instead of defining new entity types, duplicate the Heroin entity type that you 

have just defined and edit its value to be Cocaine. To do this: 

1. From the Format menu, select Entity Types, to display the Entity Types page 

of the Chart Properties dialog. 

2. Select the Heroin entity type and click Duplicate. 

A copy of the Heroin entity type is created below the existing Heroin entity type 

and is labeled copy 1 of Heroin. 

3. Double-click on the duplicated entity to display the Edit Entity Type dialog. 

4. In the Name box type Cocaine to define the name of the entity type. 


5. Click OK to close the Edit Entity Type dialog. 

6. In the same way, create a Cannabis entity type. 


Note: Notice that the Cocaine and Cannabis entity types are included in the 

Crime and Commodities palettes. When you created a duplicate of the 

Heroin entity type, all of its properties were copied into the new entity 

type. Notice that the Drug semantic type has been assigned to each of 

these entity types. 

Do not close the Chart Properties dialog. 

How do I change the order of entity types? 

It is useful to group entity types that are similar in nature. The order in which they 

are displayed in the entity types table is the order in which they will appear in the 

Standard palette. The three entity types that you have just added are displayed at 

the bottom of the table in the Chart Properties dialog. Move these entity types so 

that they are displayed just below the Drugs entity type. To do this: 

1. Click on the first entity type (Heroin) and, while holding down the Ctrl key, click 

to select the other two entity types (Cocaine and Cannabis). 

2. Drag the selected entity types up the list and drop them just below the Drugs 

entity type. 


How do I add an entity to a chart? 

Add an entity to your chart for each of the entity types that you have just created. 

To do this: 

1. On the palette bar click the drop-down arrow, and select Commodities to 

display the Commodities palette: 



Dan BUXHAM 

2. The palette bar displays the entity types in the Commodities palette. This 

includes the three new entity types that you have just created: 

3. Select the Heroin entity type, drag it onto the chart and place it above Jolene 

JOHNSON. 

4. Edit the name of this entity to be Sample 1: Heroin. 

5. Drag the Cocaine entity type onto your chart, place it above Dimitri ZANIER, 

and edit its name to be Sample 2: Cocaine. 

6. Drag the Cannabis entity type onto your chart, place it above Herbie PARKER, 

and edit its name to be Sample 3: Cannabis. 

Your chart should now look similar to that below: 

Sample 1: Heroin Sample 2: Cocaine Sample 3: Cannabis 


Dimitri ZANIER 


Bob JAMES 

Sandra CASTE 

Click the Save toolbar button to save your chart. 


Debbie Carter 

Herbie PARKER 

Justin DRINKWATER


Defining Link Types 1.4 

Link types are categories of links. They can represent, for example, associations, 

transactions or commodity transfers. When you add a link type to your chart (for 

example Sighting, Associates) it becomes a link, for example: 

Link Type 

(in palette) 

You can define the following properties for link types: 

Name The label displayed for the link type in the palette. 

Color The line color of the link type. 

Select a link type 

from the palette, 

as you draw the link between 

two entities it becomes 

a link. 

Associates 

Male 1 Female 1 

Link 

(on chart) 

Semantic Type The basic category of information used to classify the link type. 

For more information on semantic types, refer to How do I 

assign a semantic type to a link type? on page 36. 

User Palettes The palette(s) that the link type will appear on. A link type is 

automatically added to the Standard palette but you can add it 

to as many other palettes as you wish. 


Defining Link Types 

How do I define a new link type? 

The drugs are known to be imported into the country by three individuals, Jolene 

JOHNSON, Dimitri ZANIER and Herbie PARKER. Create a new link type, 

Importer, to show this information on your chart. To do this: 

1. From the Format menu, select Link Types to display the Link Types page: 


Dan BUXHAM 

Sample 1: Heroin 

2. Click New. This displays the New Link Type dialog: 


3. In the Name box, type Importer to define the name of this link type. 

4. From the Color drop-down list, select a color, for example Violet. 

5. In the User Palettes area, select Individuals and Crime. 

6. Click OK to close the New Link Type dialog, and to return to the Link Types 

page of the Chart Properties dialog. 

The Importer link type is created at the bottom of the link types table. 


8. From the Individuals palette, add Importer links to the chart as shown below: 

Importer Importer Importer 


Sample 2: Cocaine Sample 3: Cannabis 


Herbie PARKER 


Bob JAMES Sandra CASTE Debbie Carter Justin DRINKWATER 




How do I duplicate a link type? 

You do not know who is supplying the importers with the drugs. Create a new link 

type, Supplier, and show this information by duplicating and editing the Importer 

link type. To do this: 

1. From the Format menu, select Link Types to display the Link Types page of 

the Chart Properties dialog: 

2. Select the Importer link type and click Duplicate. A copy of the Importer link 

type is created. 


3. Click Properties. This displays the Edit Link Type dialog: 

4. In the Name box, type Supplier. 

5. From the Color drop-down list, select Lime. 


Note: The Supplier link type is included in the Individuals and Crime palettes. 

When you copied the Importer link type all of its properties were copied 

with it. 

Do not close the Edit Link Type dialog. 



How do I assign a semantic type to a link type? 

You assign semantic types to link types in the same way as you assigned semantic 

types to entity types, see How do I assign a semantic type to an entity type? on 

page 27. 

1. Click the Browse button in the Semantic Type area to display the Select 

Semantic Type dialog: 

2. In the Semantic Type navigation tree, click the plus sign to the left of 

Organization Link to expand the Semantic Type navigation tree and select Is 

Supplier of: 

3. Click OK to close the Select Semantic Type dialog. 

4. Click OK to close the Edit Link Type dialog. 



Dan BUXHAM 

Anonymous 1 


6. Add the three suppliers to your chart. To do this, hold down the Shift key and, 

from the Individuals palette, place three Anonymous entities on your chart just 

above the three drugs entities. 

Note: Release the Shift key before you add the third Anonymous entity to your 

chart. 

7. Add Supplier links between the Anonymous entities and the drugs entities so 

that your chart looks similar to that below: 

Anonymous 2 Anonymous 3 

Supplier Supplier Supplier 






Bob JAMES Sandra CASTE Debbie Carter Justin DRINKWATER 


Herbie PARKER 


Defining Attribute Classes 

Defining Attribute Classes 1.5 

Attribute classes are categories of attribute that are available for use on your chart, 

for example Previous Convictions, or Last Surveillance Log. Each attribute class 

has a name, a symbol and a data type (the data type defines the kind of 

information that the attribute can contain). 

An attribute entry is an attribute with a preset value stored in a palette, for example 

a flag attribute of Previous Convictions with a value of YES. 

An attribute instance is a single use of an attribute on a chart item. You can create 

attribute instances by adding either an attribute class to an item and entering the 

value, or adding an attribute entry having a specific value. 

You can define the following properties for an attribute class: 

Symbol The symbol that will be used to represent the attribute class on 

the chart, for example a red triangle. 

Name The name of the attribute class. 

Type The data type: Text, Number, Date & Time or Flag. 

Semantic Type The basic category of information used to classify the attribute 

class, for example the Date of Birth property semantic type can 

be used to add information to person-like attribute classes. For 

more information on semantic types, refer to How do I assign a 

semantic type to an attribute class? on page 44. 

User Palettes The palette(s) that the attribute class will appear on as an 

attribute class. An attribute class is automatically added to the 

Standard palette but it can be added to as many other palettes 

as you wish. 

Display The way in which the attribute class is displayed on the chart. 

For example, you can display an attribute class with a value, a 

prefix, a suffix, its class name, and a symbol. You can also 

decide to display, or not display, the attribute class on the chart 

Behavior The rules that apply to the attribute class if you paste or merge 

items having the same attribute class into your chart. 

Some attribute classes are defined automatically by Analyst’s Notebook. They 

appear in the attribute classes list with a yellow background. You cannot edit or 

delete these attribute classes. These are known as automatic attributes. 


Data types An attribute class can have one of four different data types: 

Data Type Description 


Text A textual description, for example the names of drugs with 

values such as: Cocaine, Heroin, Cannabis. 

Number A numeric value, for example a person’s age, or a monetary 

amount. 

Date & Time A date and time, for example the date and time of a meeting. 

Flag A value of YES or NO, for example whether a person is a 

known drugs dealer or not. 

How do I define an attribute class? 

Records show that one of the suspects, Justin DRINKWATER, has been under 

surveillance for several months. The last surveillance log available for him is dated 

21 January 2006. Define the Last Surveillance Log attribute class. To do this: 

1. From the Format menu, select Attribute Classes to display the Attribute 

Classes page of the Chart Properties dialog: 



2. Click the New drop-down list, and select Date & Time. 

This displays the New Attribute Class dialog: 

3. Replace the text in the Name box with Last Surveillance Log. 

4. In the Symbol area, click the drop-down arrow and select the binoculars symbol 

(in the fourth column from the end). 

5. In the User Palettes area, turn on the Individuals and Crime check boxes. 

Do not close the New Attribute Class dialog. 


How do I edit the properties of an attribute class? 


The Last Surveillance Log attribute class will be displayed on your chart with both 

a date and a time. However, when you use this attribute class for items on your 

chart you want only the date to be displayed, and not the time. Edit the display 

properties of the Last Surveillance Log attribute class so that just the date is 

displayed on the chart. 

To do this, turn off the Time check box and click OK to return to the Chart 

Properties dialog. This attribute class will be displayed with a date, but no time, 

when you add it to your chart. 

Note: When you edit the properties of an attribute class, all instances of that attribute 

class (both existing and new) will be updated to reflect this change. 




How do I define a Number attribute class? 

Define an attribute class to show that Jolene JOHNSON has had previous 

convictions. To do this: 

1. Click the New drop-down list, and select Number. The New Attribute Class 

dialog is displayed: 

2. Edit this attribute class to have the following properties: 

Name Previous Conviction(s) 

Symbol Red triangle 

User Palettes Individuals, Crime 

3. Edit the properties of this attribute class so that numbers are displayed with 

zero (0) decimal places. To do this: 

a. In the Display area, make sure the Value check box is turned on. 

b. Edit the number of decimal places to be zero (0). 



4. Turn on the Suffix check box and enter a suffix of previous 

conviction(s). As you type the suffix, notice that the Sample box shows 

how this attribute class will be displayed on your chart.: 

Note: You must type a space before the suffix, otherwise there will be no 

space between the value and the suffix text. 

Do not close the New Attribute Class dialog. 


Assigning Property Semantic Types 

Assigning Property Semantic Types 1.6 

You can assign attributes to entities on the chart, which also contain semantic 

information. Property semantic types can be assigned to attribute classes in a 

chart. Property semantic types are more specific and detailed than entity semantic 

types. For example, the Date of Birth property semantic type could be assigned to 

the piece of information which is the date of birth of a person. The Nationality 

property semantic type could be assigned to the piece of information which 

records the nationality of a person. 

When you add an attribute to a chart item, the property semantic type for the 

attribute class will be assigned automatically to the chart item. You can see this by 

looking at the Attribute Instances page of the Item Properties dialog for the chart 

item. 

Note: A property semantic type can be assigned to only one attribute class in a template. 

How do I assign a semantic type to an attribute class? 

You assign semantic types to attribute classes in the same way as you assigned 

semantic types to entity types, see How do I assign a semantic type to an entity 

type? on page 27. 

1. In the New Attribute Class dialog, click the Browse button in the Semantic Type 

area to display the Select Semantic Type dialog: 


2. In the Find box, type crime type. 


As you start to type, the Ordered Results list is updated with a potential match 

and the navigation tree is displayed at this match in the list: Crime Type. 

3. Select the Crime Type semantic type and click OK to close the Select Semantic 

Type dialog. 

4. Click OK to return to close the New Attribute Class dialog and return to the 

Chart Properties dialog. 

Defining further attribute classes 

You know that one of the importers, Herbie PARKER, and one of the dealers, 

Debbie CARTER, are known to be armed. Define a new attribute class with the 

following properties: 

Type Text 

Name Armed 

Symbol Gun 

Semantic Type Gun Model 


Records also show that Debbie CARTER and Bob JAMES have a history of 

violence. Define a further attribute class with the following properties: 

Type Flag 

Name Violent 

Symbol Three exclamation marks 


Note: The Violent attribute class does not have a property semantic type assigned to it. 




How do I sort attribute classes in a palette? 

The order in which attribute classes are listed in the Attribute Classes page of the 

Chart Properties dialog is the order in which they are displayed on items on your 

chart. The four attribute classes that you have just created are at the bottom of the 

table. Sort all of the attribute classes so that they are displayed in alphabetical 

order. To do this: 

1. Click the Name column heading; the attribute classes are sorted alphabetically. 

Note: If the small triangle in the column header points upwards the 

attribute classes are sorted in ascending order (from A to Z). If the 

triangle is pointing downwards they are sorted in descending order 

(from Z to A). 




How do I add an attribute instance to a chart item? 


Records show that Jolene JOHNSON has had four previous convictions. Add an 

instance of the Previous Convictions attribute to show this. To do this: 

1. Double-click on Jolene JOHNSON to display the Edit Icon dialog and select 

Attributes\Instances to display the Instances page: 

2. Click Add and from the drop-down list, select Individuals ➧ Previous 

Conviction(s). A new entry is placed in the table. 

3. Jolene JOHNSON has four previous convictions. In the Value column, type 4. 

4. Click OK to close the Edit Icon dialog. 

Jolene JOHNSON is displayed on the chart with an instance of the Previous 

Convictions attribute showing that she has four previous convictions. 


4 prev ious conv iction(s) 



How do I add an attribute instance using the Attribute Bar? 

Justin DRINKWATER has been under surveillance for many months; the last 

surveillance log available for him is dated 21 January 2006. The Attribute Bar is 

displayed in the bottom right of the application window, below the palette bar. 

Create an instance of the Last Surveillance Log attribute class using the Attribute 

Bar and add it to Justin DRINKWATER. To do this: 

1. On the chart, select Justin DRINKWATER. 

2. On the Attribute Bar, in the first drop-down list (the Palette drop-down list), 

select Crime to select the Crime palette. 

Command drop-down list 

3. In the second drop-down list (the Attribute Class drop-down list), select Last 

Surveillance Log. 

4. In the Value box, edit the date to be 21 Jan 2006. 

5. In the third drop-down list (the Command drop-down list), select Add 

Attribute, then click the Apply Command button. 

Justin DRINKWATER is displayed on your chart with an attribute instance 

showing the last surveillance log on 21 Jan 2006. 

Justin DRINKWATER 

21 Jan 2006 


Palette drop-down list 

Attribute Class drop-down list 

Value box 

Apply Command button

Dealer 

Anonymous 1 






Dealer 



Dealer 


Dealer 



Dan BUXHAM Bob JAMES Sandra CASTE Debbie Carter 

Herbie PARKER 

Dealer 


21 Jan 2006 


Adding Attribute Entries to Palettes 

Adding Attribute Entries to Palettes 1.7 

An attribute entry comprises an attribute class together with a preset value. 

It is useful to add entries if you think a specific value or values will be used many 

times over, since it provides a shortcut way of adding attributes to chart items. 

How do I add an attribute entry to a palette? 

Two of the suspects, Debbie CARTER and Herbie PARKER, have been seen 

armed with guns. Debbie CARTER has been seen in possession of a shotgun and 

Herbie PARKER has been seen in possession of a handgun. Add attribute entries 

to the Armed attribute class, for shotgun and handgun and add the relevant 

attribute entry to each of the suspects. To do this: 

1. From the Format menu, select Attribute Entries. This displays the Attribute 

Entries page of the Chart Properties dialog: 

2. Click New, and from the drop-down list, select Crime ➧ Armed. 

3. In the Value column, type Handgun. 



4. You want the Handgun attribute entry to be available on the Crime and 

Individuals palettes. It already appears on the Crime palette; click the 

drop-down arrow in the User Palettes column and turn on the Individuals 

check box to add it to the Individuals palette. 

How do I duplicate an attribute entry? 

Add an attribute entry for Shotgun. To do this: 

1. Select the Handgun entry and click Duplicate. A copy of the attribute entry is 

placed below it. 

2. In the Value column, edit the value of this attribute entry to be Shotgun. 

Note: The Shotgun attribute entry is included in the Individuals and Crime 

palettes. When you created a copy of the Handgun attribute entry the 

properties that were set for it were copied into the new attribute entry. 


4. Make the Crime palette active in the palette bar. To do this, click the drop-down 

arrow on the palette bar, and from the drop-down list, select Crime. 

5. Select a Shotgun attribute entry in the attribute pane of the palette bar and drag 

it onto Debbie CARTER. 

Debbie Carter 

Shotgun 

6. Add a Handgun attribute to Herbie PARKER using the attribute entry. 

Herbie PARKER 

Handgun 



Adding Attribute Entries to Palettes 

Adding further attribute entries 

You know that Debbie CARTER and Bob JAMES have a history of violence. Add 

an attribute entry, of type Violent, to your chart. To do this: 

1. Right-click in the attribute pane of the palette bar, and from the shortcut menu, 

select Edit Attribute Entries to display the Attribute Entries page of the Chart 

Properties dialog: 

2. Click New and select Standard ➧ Violent to select the Violent attribute class. 

3. In the Value column cell, make sure that the value is set to YES. 

Note: You can change the value between YES and NO by clicking . 

4. Click the drop-down arrow in the User Palettes column, and turn on the 

Individuals and Crime check boxes to add this attribute entry to these palettes. 



How do I add an attribute to several items at the same time? 

Dealer Dealer 

Dan BUXHAM 

Anonymous 1 


Add attribute entries to Debbie CARTER and Bob JAMES to show that they have a 

history of violence. To do this: 

1. On the chart select both Debbie CARTER and Bob JAMES. 

2. Right-click on the Violent attribute entry in the attribute pane of the palette bar, 

and from the shortcut menu, select Add to Selected Items. 

Your chart should now look similar to that below (Example 1 finished.anb): 







Bob JAMES 

YES 


Dealer 

Sandra CASTE 


Herbie PARKER 

Handgun 

Dealer Dealer 

Debbie Carter 

Shotgun 

YES 


21 Jan 2006 


Summary 

Summary 1.8 

In this example you will have learned how to: 

• create entity types and add them to palettes 

• create link types and add them to palettes 

• create attribute classes and add them to palettes 

• assign semantic types to entity and link types, and attribute classes 

• use the Attribute Bar to add attribute instances 

• create attribute entries and add them to palettes 


Creating Templates 

2 

This example explains how you can create a new template file, and define the 

grading system and line strengths. 

Contents 


Creating a Template 57 

Defining the Grading System 65 

Defining Line Strengths 69 

Creating a Chart Using a Template 71 

Summary 75 

Draft - i2 Confidential (Issue: 0.8) i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide: Customizing & Analyzing 55

Introduction 



Scenario 


• creating a new template 

• defining the grading system 

• defining line strengths 

• locating a template so that you can use it 

• creating a chart from a template 



page 17. 

You can see the finished template (Example 2 Template.ant) at any time 

while you are working through this example. To access the folder in which this 

template is stored, double-click on the User Guide Example Material shortcut in 

the My Documents\i 2\i 2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 folder, and double-click 

on the User Guide - Customizing and Analyzing folder. This example 

also has a chart that verifies the contents of the template (Example 2 

finished.anb), this file can also be found at the above location. 

Marc BAKER, a director of Arcacia Investments, is an associate of another 

suspect, known as Mr STEELE. Mr STEELE lives at 5 Silver Street, Crownsville. 

Unconfirmed reports indicate that Mr STEELE may be a known suspect, Sam 

STEELE. An unknown individual uses 5 Silver Street, Crownsville as the 

subscriber address for a cellphone, number 07787 162 534. 

Telephone records show that Marc BAKER is the owner of a cellphone, number 

07786 563 412. This cellphone has called cellphone number 07787 162 534. 

56 i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide: Customizing & Analyzing Draft - i2 Confidential (Issue: 0.8)

Chapter 2: Creating Templates 

Creating a Template 2.2 

Templates provide a convenient starting point for new charts. Analyst’s Notebook 

is distributed with some predefined templates, but you can also create your own 

templates containing all of the types and properties that you frequently use. For 

example, you may have a template that contains just the types and properties that 

are commonly used to chart the findings of fraud investigations. 

You can create a template from an existing chart or template, or you can create a 

new template from scratch. 

You can define the following in a template: 

• entity types and default styles 

• link types and default styles 

• attribute classes and attribute entries 

• line strengths 

• grades 

• date and time formats 

• palettes 

• page setup 

• legend 

• chart items 

• semantic types 


Creating a Template 

How do I create a new template? 

For each chart that you create during this investigation, you want the same types, 

styles, and properties to be defined, ready for use. Create a new template and add 

all of the types, styles and properties so that you can use the template as the 

starting point whenever you create a new chart. To do this: 

1. From the File menu, select New From Template to display the New From 

Template dialog. 

2. In the Create a area, select Template. 



3. In the Based on area, select Empty Template, then click OK. A new empty 

template is created. 

Note: The palette bar contains the default Entity type, but it does not contain 

any other entity types or attribute entries. 

4. Save this file as a template file. To do this: 

a. From the File menu, select Save As. 

b. Click OK on the Cover Sheet dialog to display the Save As dialog. 

c. Select the folder that you created to save your charts to. 

d. Enter a name for your template (Example 2 Template.ant). 

e. Click Save. 



How do I define entity types from an existing chart? 

Call made by FARMER 

Target in Operation Crest. 

A joint police and customs 

investigation 

into drug importation, money 

laundering and 

forgery. 

The entity types that you want to add to this template have already been defined in 

an existing chart. Instead of defining the entity types from scratch, copy them from 

this chart into the new template. To do this: 

1. Open the chart Example 2 types.anb. 

Mr STEELE 

English 

Address 

5 Silver Street 

Crownsville 

UK 

Believed to crew 

on vessel 

Associates 

MOONSHADOW 

White 

UK Registered 

Stuart WRIGHT 

English 

Registered Owner 

456 FGT 

Black Saab 900 

Mailing Address 

2. Select the following entities: 

— Marc BAKER (Male) 

— 07787 563 412 (Cellphone) 

— No subscriber details available (Anonymous) 

— 5 Silver Street, Crownsville (House) 

Note: Click on the first entity, and while holding down the Ctrl key, click on the 

remaining entities to select them. 

60 i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide: Customizing & Analyzing Draft - i2 Confidential (Issue: 0.8) 

Owner 

Arcacia Investments 

Marc BAKER 

English 

Box 518 

Finchley Road 

Crownsville 

UK 

Subscriber 

Called 

RP1 

Called 

RP2 

02703 871 117 

Station Lobby 

Caledonian Road 

1 

07786 162 534 

Diverts to 

RZ/6 

07787 563 412 

Called 

RP3 

Called 

RP4 

Subscriber 

No subscriber 

details available


3. With all four entities still selected, right-click on one of them, and from the 

shortcut menu, select Copy Selection Only. 

Note: The Copy Selection Only command copies just the selected entities. It 

does not copy any of the links that are attached to them. 

4. Close the Example 2 types chart. Example 2 Template is now the active chart. 

5. From the Edit menu, select Paste to paste the copied selection into your 

template. 

Note: When the warning is displayed that some of the entities do not fall within 

the grading system, click OK. 

6. Click the Fit Chart in Window toolbar button to see the entire chart. 

When you paste the four entities into your template they are re-created as entity 

types. These are displayed in the palette bar. 

Note: Any properties that were defined for these entities in the original chart have also 

been added to the template. For example, Marc BAKER has a Nationality attribute 

to show that he is English, and 5 Silver Street, Crownsville has a Country attribute 

to show that it is a UK address. These attributes have been added to the template 

as attribute classes. 



When you create a new chart from this template you do not want the entities that 

you have pasted into the template to be on the chart. With the four items on the 

template still selected, press the Delete key. 

When you delete the entities from the template, the entity types and attribute 

classes are still defined. 

1. From the Format menu, select Entity Types. The entity types are displayed in 

the Entity Types page of the Chart Properties dialog: 



2. Select Attribute Classes; the attribute classes that you copied into the 

template (Nationality and Country) are displayed in the Attribute Classes page: 

3. Click Cancel to close the Chart Properties dialog. 

4. Click the Save toolbar button to save your template. 



How do I define entity types in a template? 

You may not have an existing chart containing all of the entity types you want to 

define in your template. You can define new entity types within the template itself. 

How to do this is described in Defining Entity Types on page 21. 

Define the following entity types in your template: 

Name Semantic Type Icon 

Associates Person White Square 

(sqrwhite) 

Organization Organization Green Square 

(sqrgreen) 

Note: You can change the line color and shade color of entity types, and assign them to 

palettes but you are not interested in that now. When you add the above entity 

types, accept the default color settings. 

How do I define link types in a template? 

You can define link types in your template in the same way that you define entity 

types, by either copying them from an existing chart or defining them within the 

template. 

Define the following link types in your template. How to do this is described in 

Defining Link Types on page 31. 

• Associate (Semantic Type: Associate Of) 

• General (Semantic Type: Link) 

• Subscriber (Semantic Type: Is Subscriber Of) 

• Telephone Call (Semantic Type: Phone Call To) 

• Address (Semantic Type: Has Address Of) 

Note: You can change the color of link types and assign them to palettes but you are not 

interested in that now. When you add the above link types, accept the default color 

settings. 

Click the Save toolbar button to save your template. 



Defining the Grading System 2.3 

You can define the grading system to use when you add information to your chart. 

The grading system that you define will depend on the grading system convention 

that has been adopted by your organization. 

For the purposes of this example, the grading system is made up of three grades: 

Grade 1 The reliability ratings of the source: Reliable Source, Sometimes 

Reliable Source, Unreliable Source, Untested Source. 

Grade 2 The privacy ratings of the information: Confidential, Signature 

Required, Unrestricted. 

Grade 3 The reliability of the information: Reliable Information, Unreliable 

Information, Information Quality Unknown. 

In addition to this you can specify the source type for this information, for example 

the types of person from which the information was obtained. In this example the 

source types that are used are: Officer, Informant, Witness, and Record. 

We recommend that you only make changes to the grading system when your 

chart is empty. You should also be careful if you are copying chart items from one 

chart to another if the two charts have different grading systems. 


Defining the Grading System 

How do I define the grading system? 

The information that you have received during this investigation is all graded. 

Define the grading system so that you can add grades to items in charts created 

using this template. To do this: 

1. From the File menu, select Chart Properties, and then click 

Definitions\Grading System to display the Grading System page of the Chart 


2. In this template, the Grade 1 area will be used to grade source information. In 

the Grade 1 area, click New. A new entry is created in the table. 

3. Edit the name of this entry to be Reliable Source. 



4. Add the remaining entries to the Grade 1 area using the same method: 

5. In this template, the Grade 2 area will be used to grade privacy information. 

Add the following entries in the Grade 2 area: 

6. The Grade 3 area will be used to grade the reliability of the information. Add the 

following entries in the Grade 3 area: 


Defining the Grading System 

7. The Source area will be used to list the different source types for the 

information. Add the following source types in the Source area: 


You have now completed the definition of the grading system in your template. 




Defining Line Strengths 2.4 

Line strengths are typically used to represent the strength of the information on 

your chart. The line strengths that you define will depend on the convention 

adopted by your organization. 

For the purposes of this example, the following line strengths are used: 

How do I define line strengths? 

Confirmed 

Unconfirmed 

Hypothesis 

The strength of the information on your chart varies, some of it is confirmed, but 

there are occasions when some happenings are unconfirmed or hypothetical. 

Define three line strengths in your template so that you can show this. To do this: 

1. From the Format menu, select Line Strengths to display the Line Strengths 

page of the Chart Properties dialog: 


Defining Line Strengths 

2. The Default line strength has already been defined for you. Double-click to 

rename the Default line strength to be Confirmed. 

3. Click New to define a new line strength. A new line strength is created below 

the Confirmed line strength. 

4. Edit the name of this line strength to be Hypothesis and, from the Strength 

drop-down list, select the dotted line. 

5. Add a further line strength, edit its name to be Unconfirmed and, from the 

Strength drop-down list, select the dashed line. 


How do I change the order of line strengths? 

Line strengths are displayed in the order in which you specify them. The line 

strength at the top of the table is used as the default line strength when new chart 

items are created. In this template the default line strength is Confirmed. The 

second most used line strength is Unconfirmed. Change the order in which the line 

strengths are displayed so that the Unconfirmed line strength is positioned above 

the Hypothesis line strength in the list. To do this: 

1. Select the Unconfirmed line strength and drag it so that it is positioned above 

the Hypothesis line strength. 


You have now defined entity types, link types, line strengths, and the grading 

system to your template. 

Save and close your template. 



Creating a Chart Using a Template 2.5 

When you have created a template you can use it to create new charts. 

Templates can be stored as: 

Standard template The Standard template, provided with Analyst’s 

Notebook, is used when Analyst’s Notebook is 

started, or when the New Standard Chart command 

is used to create a new chart. This file is typically 

stored locally on your computer. 

Local template In a typical Analyst’s Notebook installation, template 

files are stored locally on a computer. 

Workgroup template If your organization runs Analyst’s Notebook from a 

network, some of the template files that are created 

may be shared by several users. 

How do I create a chart using a specific template? 

Create a new chart using your Example 2 Template. To do this: 

1. From the File menu, select New From Template to display the New From 

Template dialog: 


Creating a Chart Using a Template 

2. Click Browse to locate your template. The Select Template File dialog is 

displayed. 

3. Find and select Example 2 Template.ant. This should be in the folder you 

created to store your example charts in. See Storing the charts created in the 

worked examples on page 16. Click Open to return to the New From Template 

dialog. 

4. Click OK to create a new chart. 



A new empty chart is created. Notice the entity types that you defined are 

available in the palette bar: 

5. Save this chart; from the File menu, select Save As. Click OK on the Cover 

Sheet dialog to display the Save As dialog. Select the folder that you created to 

save your charts to. Type Example 2 Creating Templates.anb in the 

File Name box and click Save. 


Creating a Chart Using a Template 

Verifying a template 

Add information to this chart to verify that your template contains all of the items 

and properties that you defined. Your finished chart should look similar to that 

below (Example 2 finished.anb): 

Subscriber Subscriber address 

Associate 

Called 

07786 563 412 07787 162 534 


Marc BAKER 

Mr STEELE 

Same person 

Save and close your chart. 


Crownsville 

Address 

Associates 

Subscriber 

Sam STEELE Paul SHARP 

Anonymous 



Summary 2.6 


• create a new template 

• define the grading system 

• define line strengths 

• locate a template so that you can use it 

• create a chart from a template 


Summary 


3 

Creating a Template from a Chart 

This example explains how you can create a template from an existing chart. 

Contents 


Creating a Template from an Existing Chart 79 

Setting a New Grid Size 83 

Defining Date and Time Formats 85 

Specifying Default Entity and Link Styles 91 

Displaying the Time Bar 92 

Adding User Palettes 96 

Verifying Templates 101 

Sharing Templates 103 

Summary 105 


Introduction 



Scenario 


• creating a template from an existing chart and using parts of the chart as the 

starting point for the template 

• setting the grid size 

• specifying default entity and link styles 

• defining date and time formats 

• changing the time bar display 

• creating user palettes 

If you need any more information or help with using a specific feature, refer to the 


page 17. 






You have been working on an undercover investigation involving the importation of 

drugs involving the cruiser MOONSHADOW. Initially, this was a one-off operation 

but it has now become apparent that MOONSHADOW and two of the suspects, 

Sam STEELE and Paul SHARP are also targets in other undercover investigations. 

Instead of defining entity types, link types and properties each time you create a 

new chart, you will create a template containing all of the types and properties that 

you will use when you add the findings of these undercover investigations to a 

chart. 


Chapter 3: Creating a Template from a Chart 

Creating a Template from an Existing Chart 3.2 

To save time during an investigation if you have to create several similar charts, it is 

a good idea to create a template that contains all of the entity types, link types and 

properties that you frequently use. 

There are two ways that you can create a template: 

• Create a new empty template (how to do this is described in 

Chapter 2, Creating Templates). 

• Create a template (.ant file), from an existing chart (.anb file), containing all 

of the entity types, link types, and properties that you want to use when 

creating similar charts during an investigation. 

When you create a template from an existing chart you can choose which parts of 

the chart are included in the template. For example, in your investigation you may 

have a common theme line or event frame, or a legend, that you want to display on 

each new chart that you create using the template. 


Creating a Template from an Existing Chart 

How do I create a template from an existing chart? 

MOONSHADOW 

Sam STEELE 

Paul SHARP 

A chart exists that contains most of the types that you want in your template. 

Create a new template, containing just a legend and the theme lines from this 

chart. To do this: 

Officer 





Sighting 

Tricksters Bar 

Seen drinking together in a 

bar in London. They seemed 

to be having a heated 

discussion about something. 

20 Feb 2006 13:08 

Sighting 

CS 789/a 

2. Select all of the theme lines. 

3. From the Edit menu, select Invert Selection. 

This deselects all of the theme lines but selects all of the event frames and 

links on the chart. 

4. Press the Delete key to delete all of the event frames and links from the chart. 


Officer 

Officer 

Sighting 

Observed 

STEELE was seen on 

board the vessel as it 

sailed into the harbor at 

Castries. 

24 Feb 2006 08:14 

Sighting 

Heathrow 

DS 787/09 

SHARP flew to St Lucia 

on the 11:30 flight from 

Heathrow. 

FM AB164 

24 Feb 2006 06:30 

Moored in port 

Officer 

Seen moored 

in the harbor. 

25 Feb 2006 14:02 

Sighting 

DS 787/10 

Seen in 'Liquide X', a bar in the 

harbor. He appeared to be on 

his own and was looking out at 

the boats moored on the 

pontoons. 

Officer 

Seen in bar 

27 Feb 2006 08:25 

Vessel was seen moored 

in a different location to 

its previous sighting. 

Officer 

27 Feb 2006 13:30 

DS 672/02 

Port 

DS 456/01 

St Lucia Drug Smuggling 

Cruiser 

Bar 

Surveillance 

Sighting 

Male 

Airport 

Port 

Traveled


This leaves just the theme lines and the legend on the chart. 

The chart with just theme lines and a legend is the starting point for your 

template. 

5. From the File menu, select Create Template to display the Create Template 

From dialog. 

6. In the Local Template box, enter the name of the template file (Example 3 

Template). 

7. Make sure that the theme lines and the legend are included in the template. To 

do this, turn on the Include Chart Items And Legend check box. 


Creating a Template from an Existing Chart 

8. Click OK to close the Create Template dialog. 

9. Close the chart; do not save any changes. 

How do I open a template to edit it? 

The Example 3 Template is stored locally on your computer. Open it so that you 

can edit it and add more information to it. To do this: 

1. From the File menu, select Open to display the Open dialog and locate 

Example 3 Template.ant. To access the folder in which this template is 

stored, double-click on the Templates shortcut in the My Documents\i2\i2 

Analyst's Notebook 7 folder. 

2. Click Open to open Example 3 Template.ant. 



Setting a New Grid Size 3.3 

In Analyst’s Notebook you can turn on the grid to enable you to align items on the 

chart. How to do this is described in i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide: Creating 

Charts. 

You can change the horizontal and vertical spacing of the grid, so that it is more 

appropriate to the size of, for example, event frames, icons and theme lines. 

How do I set the grid size? 

You need to change the grid settings in this template so that they are more suitable 

for the types of information that you are going to add to charts created from it. To 

do this: 

1. Click the Grid On or Off toolbar button to display the grid. 

2. From the File menu, select Chart Properties and select Options\Display to 

show the Display page of the Chart Properties dialog: 

3. In the Horizontal Spacing box set the grid size to be 0.25 inches (0.64 

centimeters). 


Setting a New Grid Size 

4. In the Vertical Spacing box set the grid size to be 0.5 inches (1.27 

centimeters). 

5. Click OK. 


The grid is displayed with the new horizontal and vertical spacing that you 

specified. The theme lines are aligned on the left of the chart. 

How do I display the grid by default? 

Each time a new chart is created from this template you want the grid to be 

displayed by default. Click the Save toolbar button to save the template. The next 

time you create a new chart from this template the grid will be displayed. 



Defining Date and Time Formats 3.4 

Analyst’s Notebook allows you to define date and time formats for items on your 

chart. Typical date and time formats can contain: 

• only a date, for example 23 Jan 2007 

• only a time, for example 14:15 

• both a date and a time, for example 23 Jan 2007 14:15 

Each part of the date and time format can be separated by a space, hyphen or any 

symbol to match the date and time format that your organization uses. 

You can use any of the components listed below when defining a date and time 

format. An example date and time format using these components could be 

dd MMM yyyy HH:mm, which will be displayed as 12 Sep 2007 18:30. 

The lists below show some of the components that you may use when defining 

date and time formats. A complete list of these components is available in the 

online help. 

Date formats W The Windows date; this is the date format specified in your 

Windows settings. 

d Day of the month, no leading zero, for example 1. 

dd Two digit day of the month, for example 01. 

ddd Short day name, for example Mon. 

dddd Long day name, for example Monday. 

M Month number, no leading zero, for example 1. 

MM Two digit month number, for example 01. 

MMM Short month name, for example Sep. 

MMMM Long month name, for example September. 

y Year, no leading zero, for example 2. 

yy Two digit year, for example 07. 

yyyy Four digit year, for example 2007. 

D Day of week, first letter only, for example M. 

DD Day of month with an ordinal, for example 1st. 


Defining Date and Time Formats 

Time formats w The Windows time; this is the time format specified in your 

Windows settings. 

h Hour of day, 12 hour clock, no leading zero, for example 3. 

hh Two digit hour of day, 12 hour clock, for example 03. 

H Hour of day (24 hour clock), no leading zero, for example 3. 

HH Two digit hour of day (24 hour clock), for example 15. 

t First letter of AM/PM specifier, for example P. 

tt AM/PM specifier, for example AM. 

m Minutes, no leading zero, for example 1. 

mm Two digit minutes, for example 01. 

s Seconds, no leading zero, for example 9. 

ss Two digit seconds, for example 09. 

z The number of hours greater or less than UTC, no leading 

zero, for example GMT will be displayed as 11:34 +1 (UTC +1 

hour). 

zz The number of hours greater than or less than UTC, for 

example GMT will be displayed as 11:24 +01 (UTC +1 hour). 

Z The short name of the time zone, for example PST. 

ZZ The long name of the time zone, for example Pacific 

Standard Time. 


How do I define a date and time format? 


The template has inherited all of the date and time formats that were defined in the 

Example 3 initial chart. Add two new date and time formats, one to display the full 

date and time, and one that shows just the date, with no time. To do this: 

1. Click the Edit Chart Properties toolbar button to display the Chart Properties 

dialog. Select Definitions\Date & Time Formats to display the Date & Time 

Formats page: 

2. Click New. A new date and time format is added to the table. 

3. In the Name column, edit the name of this date and time format to be Long 

date and time. 

4. In the Format column, type dd MMMM yyyy HH:mm:ss and press the Enter 

key. 

Note: When you have finished adding this date and time format notice that the 

Sample column shows an example of how it will appear on the chart. 

5. Click New again. 

6. Define a date and time format that displays just the date and no time. In the 

Name column, edit the name of this date and time format to be No time. 


Defining Date and Time Formats 

7. In the Format column, type dd MMM yyyy and press the Enter key. 


How do I find the chart time zone? 

You want the time zone that is used when creating a chart from this template to be 

(GMT -05:00): Eastern Time (N America). To find the chart time zone: 

Click the Edit Chart Properties toolbar button to display the Chart 

Properties dialog. Select Defaults\Date & Time to display the Date & Time 

page: 

1. In the Time Zone area, from the drop-down list, select (GMT -05:00): Eastern 

Time (N America). 





Specifying Default Entity and Link Styles 3.5 

If your organization always displays an entity representation or link type with the 

same properties, such as the date and time format, font, or color, you can specify a 

default style rather than change the properties as you add each item to the chart. 

There is a default style for each representation. 

There are two ways that you can set the default styles of an entity representation 

or link: 

• edit the style of items on the chart and set the default style 

• edit the default style of a representation directly 

How do I specify the default style of a theme line? 

Set the default display properties for theme lines so that they extend to the leftmost 

and rightmost items on the chart. Set the right terminator to be a triangle. To do 

this: 

1. Select all of the theme lines. 

2. From the Edit menu, select Item Properties and select Style\Display to show 

the Display page: 


Specifying Default Entity and Link Styles 

3. From the Right Terminator drop-down list, select Triangle. 

4. To extend the theme lines to the leftmost item on the chart, turn on the 

Leftmost Chart Item check box. 

5. To extend the theme lines to the rightmost item on the chart, turn on the 

Rightmost Chart Item check box. 

6. You want every theme line that you add to a chart using this template to have 

the same display properties that you have just set. To do this, turn on the Set 

Default Style check box. 

7. Click OK to close the Combined Properties dialog. 

The theme lines are now displayed on your chart with a triangle as the right-hand 

terminator. The theme lines also extend to the leftmost and rightmost item on the 

chart. Any theme lines you add to a chart that are created from this template will 

have the same display properties set. 



How do I specify the default style of an event frame? 


You can set the default style of any entity representation or link. Set the default 

style of an event frame so that the description and the long date and time format is 

displayed. To do this: 

1. From the Format menu, select Set Default Styles and select Event 

Frame\Display to show the Display page: 

2. You want the grades to be displayed by default. Make sure that the Grades 

check box is turned on. 

3. In the Displayed Date & Time area, from the Format drop-down list, select 

Long date and time. The date and time format that you added to the template 

will be used in all event frames. 

4. Click OK to close the Set Default Styles dialog. 



Displaying the Time Bar 

Displaying the Time Bar 3.6 

Major Tick 

You can choose to turn on the display of the time bar in your template, so that each 

time a new chart is created from it the time bar is displayed. 

You can choose which components of the time bar are visible. A typical time bar 

showing all of its components is shown below: 

Marker Symbol 

A time bar consists of the following components: 

• Interval Band 

Minor Tick 

Interval Label 

The interval band shows you the intervals that the time bar is displayed in, for 

example hours, days, weeks. 

You can edit the line color of the interval band and specify a font for interval 

labels. You can also choose the placement of the interval label within the 

interval band. 


Overlap Marker 

Interval Band 

Tick Band 

Marker Band

• Tick Band 


The tick band consists of major ticks, for example at hourly intervals. Each 

major tick may be labeled with the time. Minor ticks show intervals of time 

between the major ticks, for example minutes. Minor ticks do not have any 

labels but if you hover your mouse over a minor tick a tooltip, containing the 

date and time at that point on the chart, will be displayed. 

As with the interval band you can edit the line color of the tick band and specify 

the font to be used for tick labels. You can also specify where the label is placed 

on the tick. 

• Marker Band 

The marker band contains marker symbols which indicate when there are 

items on the chart that are controlling. An overlap marker is displayed if you 

have two or more controlling chart items that are positioned in close proximity 

to each other on the chart. 

Overlap markers and marker symbols do not have any labels. If you hover your 

mouse over a marker symbol a tooltip will be displayed containing the label of 

the chart item and its date and time. If you hover your mouse over an overlap 

marker a tooltip will be displayed showing how many controlling chart items are 

at that position on the chart. 

You can edit the line color of the marker band and the color to be used for the 

marker symbol and the overlap marker. 

There are a number of additional display options you can set for your time bar, 

such as its background and border colors. 

How do I change the time bar display? 

Display the time bar in your template. To do this: 

1. Click the Time Bar toolbar button. 


Displaying the Time Bar 

The time bar is displayed at the top of the chart window: 

2. Double-click in the time bar to open the Time Bar\Display page of the Chart 




3. In the Interval Band area, make sure that the Show check box is turned on. 

4. In the Tick Band area, click on the drop-down list and change the line color to 

be Red. 

5. In the Tick Label Alignment area, set the default tick label alignment to be 

left-aligned by selecting the top option. 


The time bar is displayed with all of the properties that you have just set. 



Adding User Palettes 

Adding User Palettes 3.7 

The Standard palette, provided with Analyst’s Notebook, contains all of the types 

and attributes that are defined in your chart. You can also create subsets of the 

Standard palette, known as user palettes. User palettes are typically used to group 

similar types and attributes so that you can easily find them when adding 

information to your chart. 

You can create any number of user palettes. A type or attribute can be used in 

more than one palette. 

In the example below, the Standard palette contains all of the types and attributes. 

User palette 1 is a subset of the Standard palette and contains all of the types and 

attributes associated with locations. User palette 2 is also a subset of the Standard 

palette and contains the types and attributes associated with individuals. The 

House type is defined in both User palette 1 and User palette 2. 

Standard palette 

Telephone Motorcycle 

Bar 

Male 

User palette 1 User palette 2 

House 

Port 

Drugs 


Female

How do I add a user palette? 

Add a new user palette to your template. To do this: 


1. From the File menu, select User Palettes to display the User Palettes dialog: 

2. Click New. A new palette is created in the table. 

3. In the Name column, edit the name of the palette to be Common and click OK to 

close the User Palettes dialog. 

How do I add content to a user palette? 

The Standard palette contains all of the entity and link types. Add some of the 

entity types from the Standard palette to the new Common palette. To do this: 

1. From the View menu, select Toolbars ➧ Palette Bar 2. 

This displays a second palette bar (Palette Bar 2) to the left of the palette bar 

(Palette Bar 1). 



2. Click on the drop-down arrow at the top of the second palette bar and select 

Common to display the new empty palette. 

3. Copy entity types from the Standard palette to the Common palette. To do this: 

a. Scroll down the Standard palette bar and select the Surveillance entity 

type. 

b. Drag the Surveillance icon from the Standard palette into the Common 

palette. 

4. Repeat step 3 to copy the following entity types from the Standard palette to the 

Common palette: 

— Port 

— Bar 

— Airport 



How do I change the order of entity types in a user palette? 

You may wish to change the order in which entity types are arranged in a user 

palette, for example to keep all of the entity types used to represent the same sort 

of information (such as different drug types) together. When you have added all 

four entity types, rearrange the order in which they are displayed in the palette. To 

do this: 

1. In the Common palette, select the Airport entity type and drag it so that it is 

positioned between the Port and Bar entity types. 

The entity types in the Common palette should now be displayed in the order 

below: 

Note: Dragging is an easy way of changing the order of entity types and 

attribute entries in palettes. However, if you wish to change the order in 

which link types and attribute classes are displayed you must do so in 

the Chart Properties dialog. 

2. Close Palette Bar 1; right-click in the toolbar and turn off the Palette Bar 1 

check box. 

3. The Attribute Bar is still displayed to the right of the Common palette. Move it so 

that it is docked underneath the Common palette. To do this, double-click the 

double bar of the Attribute Bar. 

double bar 



4. The Attribute Bar is now "undocked" and can be moved. Hold down the left 

mouse button and drag this bar below the Common palette, then release the 

mouse button. 

The Attribute Bar will now be docked below the Common palette: 




Verifying Templates 3.8 

When you have created a template that contains all the properties that you want it 

is a good idea to verify that it is correct before you start to create charts from it. 

To verify a template, create a new chart from it and consider the properties that you 

set. For example, verify that: 

• the entity and link types are available 

• the user palettes are available 

• the time bar is displayed 

• the grid is displayed 

• the default styles for entity representations and links are set 

• the legend is displayed 

How do I verify a template? 

Before you start to create new charts from this template, it is a good idea to verify 

that all of the types and settings are correct. To do this: 

1. Close the Example 3 template. 

2. From the File menu, select New From Template. 

3. From the list of Analyst’s Notebook Local Templates, select Example 3 

Template and click OK. 

4. A new chart is created. This chart has all of the properties that you specified in 

the template. Check that the following items are displayed on the chart: 

— time bar 

— grid 

— legend 

— three theme lines for Sam STEELE, Paul SHARP and MOONSHADOW 

— Common palette bar 

5. Click the drop-down arrow on the Insert Theme Line toolbar button, and select 

Common ➧ Airport to select the Airport type. 

6. Place the theme line on the chart, below the Paul SHARP theme line. Check 

that the following display properties are set for this theme line: 

— the theme line extends to both the leftmost and rightmost items on the chart 

— the right terminator is a triangle 


Verifying Templates 

7. Click the drop-down arrow on the Insert Event Frame toolbar button, and 

select Common ➧ Surveillance to select the Surveillance type from the 

Common palette. 

8. Place this event frame on the chart and add the following information to it: 

Identity Departure 

Date & Time 20 Jun 2006 18:25 

Description Flight leaves for St Lucia. 

Grades A 1 5 

Source Type Officer 

Source Reference DS 453/01 

9. Check that the event frame is displayed with the correct date and time format 

and that the grades are displayed. 

Officer 

You have now finished checking that all of the properties you set in the Example 3 

Template are available when you create a new chart from it. 

Close the chart without saving it. 

Departure 

A 1 5 

20 June 2006 18:25:00 


Flight leaves for St Lucia. 

DS 453/01


Sharing Templates 3.9 

When you have created and verified a new template on your local computer, you 

may want to share it with other users on the network. This is useful if every user is 

creating similar charts, as each chart will use the same settings, and therefore the 

presentation will be similar. 

To share a template with other users you should follow the steps below: 

• using Windows Explorer, locate the template file that you want to share 

• move the template file to an area on the network that is accessible by other 

users 

• inform the other users of the location of the template file 

Each user will need to update the Workgroup Template Folder path, in the 

Templates page of the Options dialog, with the location of the template. 

To do this: 

1. From the Tools menu, select Options, and select Options\Templates to 

display the Templates page of the Options dialog: 

2. In the Workgroup Template Folder box, enter the path of the template, for 

example C:\Documents and Settings\Your Name\Templates. 


Sharing Templates 

The next time that the user creates a new chart from a template, the template will 

be listed in the Analyst’s Notebook Workgroup Templates list. 



Summary 3.10 


• create a template from an existing chart and use parts of the chart as the 

starting point for the template 

• set the grid size 

• specify default entity and link styles 

• define date and time formats 

• change the time bar display 

• create user palettes 


Summary 


Customizing a Template 

4 

This example further demonstrates how you can create a template from an existing 

chart, merge the contents of two templates, and delete any unwanted types, 

attribute entries, and palettes from a template. 

Contents 


Customizing an Existing Template 109 

Merging Templates 113 

Verifying a New Template 120 

Summary 121 


Introduction 



Scenario 


• customizing an existing template 

• merging templates 

• deleting entity types, link types, attribute entries, and user palettes from a 

template 

• verifying a template 



page 17. 






Your department is changing the focus of its investigations. It will no longer be 

investigating any financial crimes, or those involving drugs, but will be moving on to 

investigate international crime. 

The template that you use contains types associated with financial information. It 

does not contain the national flags of those countries that your future investigations 

will focus on. You need to update the template to remove any financial types and 

add the national flags of those countries that you will focus on in the future. 


Chapter 4: Customizing a Template 

Customizing an Existing Template 4.2 

As the focus of your investigation changes you may find that the template your 

organization uses to create charts contains types, attributes, and palettes that are 

no longer of use. If you wish, you can remove any unused types from your palette. 

This is particularly useful, for example, if you are using the Standard template 

distributed with Analyst’s Notebook, and want to reduce the size and complexity of 

it so that your organization only uses those types, attributes and palettes that are of 

interest. 

How do I remove entity types from a palette? 

Your organization uses a template that contains all of the types that you regularly 

use when creating charts. Your department is no longer dealing with any crimes 

involving drugs and therefore wants to remove the entity types, link types, and 

attribute entries relating to drugs from this template. Remove the drugs entity type 

from the Commodities palette. To do this: 

1. Open the template User Guide Examples.ant. 

2. Save this template; from the File menu, select Save As. Click OK on the Cover 


save your charts in. Type Example 4 Template.ant in the File Name box 

and click Save. 

3. On the palette bar, click the drop-down arrow and select Commodities to 

display the Commodities palette: 

4. Right-click on the Drugs entity type, and from the shortcut menu, select 

Remove from Palette. 

The Commodities palette should now only contain the Commodity entity type. 


Customizing an Existing Template 

. 

How do I delete a palette from a template? 

In addition to no longer handling crimes involving drugs, your organization will no 

longer be analyzing financial crimes. Delete the Financial palette from your 

template. To do this: 


2. From the list of palettes, select Financial and click Delete; the Financial palette 

is deleted. 

3. Click OK to close the User Palettes dialog. 


How do I delete a link type from a template? 


You do not want any link type associated with financial information to be defined in 

this template. Delete the following link types: Account Banker, Account Holder, 

Deal, Check Transaction, Credit Card Transaction, Money, and Transaction. To do 

this: 


dialog, and select Definitions\Link Types to display the Link Types page: 

2. Select the following link types: Account Banker, Account Holder, Deal, Check 

Transaction, Credit Card Transaction, Money, and Transaction, and click Delete 

to delete them from the template. 

3. Click Yes to dismiss the confirmation message dialog. 



Customizing an Existing Template 

Further Customizing 

Your department has also decided that they want to display the grid when a new 

chart is created based on this template. To do this, click the Grid On or Off toolbar 

button. 




Merging Templates 4.3 

Your organization may have a template that it uses to create all of its charts. There 

may be occasions, for example if the focus of your investigation changes, when the 

template you are using does not contain the types and definitions that you want to 

use. If you have another template containing the types and definitions that you 

require then you can add them to your template. 

When you merge templates you can choose to merge the following types and 

definitions: 

• Options 

• Time Bar 

• Defaults 

• Entity Types 

• Link Types 

• Attribute Classes 

• Grading System 

• Line Strengths 

• Date and Time Formats 

• Default Styles 

• User Palettes 

There are two ways that you can copy types from one template to another: 

• Create a chart using a template containing the types that you want to copy to 

your template. Copy these items and paste them into your template. 

• Merge the contents of one template into another. 

The Standard template, distributed with Analyst’s Notebook, contains entity types 

for national flags; these are also stored in a separate template file (Flag.ant). 


Merging Templates 

In the example below, the Original Template contains all of the entity types that are 

commonly used by an organization. The Telephone Template contains other entity 

types that the organization wants to add to the Original Template. When you merge 

the Telephone Template into the Original Template its entity types are merged into 

the Original Template. 

Male Female Payphone Cellphone 

Original Template Telephone Template 

Cellphone 

Payphone 

Male 

Female 

Merged Template 

merge 

Result of merge 

Note: You can merge the contents of charts in the same way. The contents of one chart 

will be merged into the contents of another. 


How do I merge two templates? 


The template that your department uses does not contain any national flags. 

Future investigations are going to involve international crime investigation so you 

want to add some national flags to your template. Analyst’s Notebook is distributed 

with a template that contains just national flags (Flag.ant) grouped using 

palettes. Merge the entity types and palettes from the Flag template into your new 

template. To do this: 

1. From the File menu, select Merge Template to display the Merge Template 

dialog: 

2. You want to merge the flags from the Flag template into your template. In the 

Source area, select Flag. 

3. You want to use the entity types and user palettes from the Flag template. In 

the Options area, click Clear All to turn off all of the check boxes, then turn on 

the Entity Types and User Palettes check boxes. 

4. Click OK to merge the definitions. 



How do I create a new user palette? 

Your template now contains all of the flag entity types and user palettes that were 

defined in the Flag template. You only want to use a few of these flags. Create a 

new user palette in which to place them. To do this: 

1. Right-click in the palette bar, and from the shortcut menu, select Edit User 

Palettes. This displays the User Palettes dialog: 

2. Click New. A new user palette is placed at the bottom of the table. 

3. Edit the name of this user palette to be Countries and click OK to close the 

User Palettes dialog. 

How do I add entity types to a user palette? 

You want to add the following flags to your newly created Flags user palette: the 

Bahamas, Saint Lucia, the United States, and the United Kingdom. To do this: 

1. Right-click on the toolbar, and from the shortcut menu, select Palette Bar 2. 

This displays a second palette bar (Palette Bar 2) to the left of the first palette 

bar (Palette Bar 1). 

2. Click the drop-down arrow on Palette Bar 2 and select Countries to display the 

new empty Countries user palette. 



3. You want to add flags for the Bahamas, Saint Lucia, and the United States, 

these are held in the Flags - Americas palette. Click the drop-down arrow on 

Palette Bar 1 and select Flags - Americas to display it. 

4. Drag the Bahamas, Saint Lucia and United States entity types from the 

Flags - Americas palette into the Countries palette. 

5. You also want to add a flag for the United Kingdom; this is held in the 

Flags - Europe palette. Click the drop-down arrow on Palette Bar 1 and select 

Flags - Europe to display it. 

6. Drag the United Kingdom entity type from the Flags - Europe palette into the 

Countries palette. 

7. Your Countries user palette now contains entity types for the Bahamas, Saint 

Lucia, the United States and the United Kingdom. 

8. Close Palette Bar 2; right-click on the toolbar, and turn off the Palette Bar 2 

check box. 




How do I delete an entity type from a template? 

Your template now contains many more flags than you require. Delete any of the 

flags that you are not interested in. To do this: 


dialog, and select Definitions\Entity Types to display the Entity Types page. 

From the Palettes drop-down list, select Standard to display the entity types in 

the Standard palette: 

2. Click on the User Palettes column heading to sort the entity types by the 

palettes in which they appear. 

3. The first entity type that you want to delete is Algeria; click on it to select it. 

4. Scroll down the table to the Wales entity type and, while holding down the Shift 

key, click on it. This selects all of the entity types between Algeria and Wales. 

5. Click Delete to delete the selected entity types from the template. 

6. Click Yes on the confirmation message dialog. 



How do I delete a user palette? 


Your template now contains several user palettes that no longer contain any entity 

types. Delete any user palette that contains flags, taking care not to delete the 

newly defined Countries palette. To do this: 


2. Select all of the user palettes that are prefixed with Flags. 

3. Click Delete to delete these user palettes from the template. 

4. Click OK to close the User Palettes dialog. 

5. You have now completed customizing your template. Save and close it. 


Verifying a New Template 

Verifying a New Template 4.4 

When you have created or customized a template it is a good idea to verify that it 

works before you start to create charts from it or share it with other users. 

Before your department starts to use this updated template it is a good idea to 

verify that it works. Create a new chart based on your new template and use it to 

create the chart below: 

WRIGHT 

Crew 

MOONSHADOW 

Associates 

Close this chart, do not save any changes. 


Saint Lucia 

Resident 

STEELE


Summary 4.5 


• customize an existing template 

• merge templates 

• remove entity types, link types, attribute entries, and user palettes from a 

template 

• verify a template 


Summary 


5 

Showing and Hiding Information 

This example explains how you can show and hide information for presentation 

purposes. 

Contents 


Introducing Selection Sets 125 

Showing Attributes 129 

Changing the Size of an Icon 135 

Changing the Shading Color of an Icon 137 

Editing the Legend 140 

Preparing to Print a Chart 145 

Summary 154 


Introduction 



Scenario 


• selection sets 

• showing and hiding information 

• changing the size of an icon 

• changing the shading color of an icon 

• editing the chart legend 

• preparing a chart for printing 

• printing a chart 



page 17. 






A chart already exists showing a series of happenings relating to the cruiser 

MOONSHADOW and the three suspects, STEELE, SHARP and KENT. It also 

depicts items of a restricted, confidential and top secret nature, all of which are 

color coded. All of the suspects have attributes relating to their nationality and date 

of birth. These attributes are not currently displayed on the chart. Two of the icons 

on the chart (Marc BAKER and Arcacia Investments) are double the size of the 

other icons on the chart. 

You are going to present this chart to an audience that does not have the required 

security clearance to view information with a classification of top secret. The 

attributes for each of the suspects needs to be displayed, since their date and birth 

and nationality are pertinent to this investigation. You also want to make sure that 

the information is displayed accurately and that none of it is emphasized, so you 

will need to make sure that all of the icons are displayed at normal size and with 

the correct shading color. 


Chapter 5: Showing and Hiding Information 

Introducing Selection Sets 5.2 

Owner 

In Analyst’s Notebook you can add items that are selected on a chart to a selection 

set. A selection set allows you to quickly store or restore a selection. This is useful 

when you are analyzing a chart. You can create a selection set, and, as you 

perform further analysis on your chart, add items to it. You can also remove items 

from a selection set. 

You can choose to display a Selection Set attribute on items belonging to a 

selection set. This attribute is displayed below the item with a value indicating the 

selection set that it belongs to. An item can belong to more than one selection set. 

You can have up to ten different selection sets on a chart. 

In the example chart below, all of the suspects are members of Selection Set 1. All 

modes of transport are in Selection Set 2, as are their owners. All commodities 

(drugs and packages) are members of Selection Set 3, as are the people from 

which they originated. 

Package 

Cash 

Phil TAYLOR Michelle WALKER 

Associates 

Cash 

WINDSPEED 

Registered 

Keeper 

Brandon BERRIER 

Supplier 

Registered 

Keeper 

Importer 

456 FGT 

368 TRL Arthur BRADLEY Cocaine 


Introducing Selection Sets 

How do I restore the selection from a selection set? 

MOONSHADOW 

Sandra CASTE 

Associates 

Sam STEELE 

Paul SHARP 

Danny KENT 


Seen drinking together in a bar 

in London. They seemed to be 

having a heated discussion 

about something. 

A 1 5 

Officer 

20 Feb 2006 18:08 


A chart already exists showing a series of happenings relating to the cruiser 

MOONSHADOW and the three suspects, STEELE, SHARP and KENT. It contains 

items of a restricted, confidential and top secret classification, all of which are color 

coded and included in selection sets. Selection Set 0 is color coded red to indicate 

that this information is top secret. You do not want top secret information to be 

displayed when you present this chart. Find the contents of Selection Set 0. To do 

this: 





Monday 20th February 2006 Friday 24th February 2006 Saturday 25th February 2006 Saturday 25th February 2006 Saturday 25th February 2006 Sunday 26th February 2006 Monday 27th February 2006 Wednesday 1st March 2006 

13:00 14:00 15:00 

12:00 15:00 18:00 

06:00 09:00 12:00 13:30 15:00 16:30 18:00 19:10 20:00 21:00 

06:00 08:00 12:00 

14:00 15:00 16:00 19:00 20:00 21:00 

00 12:00 

16:00 17:40 

17:00 

21st 12:00 

22nd 12:00 

23rd 09:00 21:00 

00:00 03:00 00:00 22:00 

03:00 22:00 00:00 06:00 17:00 

18:00 00:00 12:00 

12:00 

18:00 00:00 

March 

12:00 18:00 

Traveled to airport in 

Director of Owner of 

456 FGT 


Marc BAKER 

Black Saab 

Associates 

Observed 

STEELE seen on board the 

vessel as it sailed into the 

harbor at Castries. 

A 1 5 

Witness 

24 Feb 2006 13:14 

Departure 

KENT flew to St Lucia. He 

traveled alone, on an open 

return ticket. 

A 1 5 

Record 

24 Feb 2006 08:30 

Seen in harbor at St Lucia 

All three were seen walking in the 

harbor. They seemed very nervous. 

Constantly checking around them as 

if to ensure they weren't being 

followed. 

A 1 5 

Witness 

25 Feb 2006 11:52 

Moored in Port 

Seen moored 


A 1 5 

Witness 

25 Feb 2006 19:02 

Return 

SHARP flew from St 

Lucia on the 22:30 flight 

to Heathrow. 

Record Manifest 

25 Feb 2006 22:30 

2. Save this chart using Save As from the File menu. Click OK on the Cover 

Sheet dialog to display the Save As dialog. Select the folder you created to 

save your charts in. Type Example 5 show and hide.anb in the File 

Name box and click Save. 


Flight paid by 

credit card 

Card no: 4587 - 9083 

Departure 

KENT boarded a flight from St 

Lucia. He traveled on the return 

portion of a cash paid, open 


A 1 5 

Record 

26 Feb 2006 08:30 

Seen in bar in St Lucia 

In 'Liquide X', a bar in the harbor. 

He appeared to be on his own 

and was looking out at the boats 

moored on the pontoons. 

A 1 5 

Officer 

27 Feb 2006 13:25 

Port 

Vessel was 

seen moored 

in a different 

location to its 

previous 

sighting. 

27 Feb 2006 18:30 

Meeting in a hotel 

Both met in a hotel bar. Agenda 

unknown. At one point SHARP 

went to reception where he used 

their phone to make a call. 

A 1 5 

Officer 

01 Mar 2006 17:37 

Telephone Call 

from reception to 

Occupant of room 

Room 203 Charles FARMER 

St Lucia Drug Smuggling - Associations 

Top Secret Confidential Restricted 

Male Cruiser Organization Car 

Airport Port Female Telephone 

Credit Surveillance Bar Meeting 

General 

Sighting 

Attendee 

Convenor Telephone Call A sso ciates 

Traveled 

Owner

3. Press 0 to select the items in Selection Set 0. 


There are two members of Selection Set 0, Jolene JOHNSON and Sandra 

CASTE. Each of these are selected on the chart. You know that they are in 

Selection Set 0 as the attribute displayed beneath the entities has a value of 0: 

Sandra CASTE 

Associates 

Sam STEELE 

Paul SHARP 

Danny KENT 







A 1 5 

Officer 

20 Feb 2006 18:08 


Marc BAKER 

Associates 


Departure 




A 1 5 

Record 

24 Feb 2006 08:30 


456 FGT 

Black Saab 


Showing and Hiding Chart Items 

Showing and Hiding Chart Items 5.3 

If you are working on a complex chart, you may want to show or hide subsets of 

the data. For example, if you are presenting a chart containing information that is of 

a classified nature you can show or hide this information depending on the security 

clearance level of the audience. This removes the need to create separate charts 

for each presentation. 

Note: When you hide a chart item, you will not be able to select it or search for it until you 

make it visible again. 

How do I hide items on a chart? 

Jolene JOHNSON and Sandra CASTE are color coded red to show that this 

information is top secret. This chart will be presented to people who do not have 

the necessary security clearance to view top secret information so you will have to 

hide this information on the chart. To do this: 

1. With the two entities (Jolene JOHNSON and Sandra CASTE) still selected, 

select Show And Hide from the View menu,. This displays the Show And Hide 

dialog: 

2. Click Hide to hide the selected items from view. 

Sandra CASTE and Jolene JOHNSON are no longer displayed on the chart. 

Note: Jolene JOHNSON and Sandra CASTE have not been deleted from the 

chart. They are still part of the chart but are hidden. This means that 

you will not be able to select them or search for them until you show 

them again. 



Showing Attributes 5.4 

When you define an attribute class, you can choose whether or not to display 

instances of it on the chart. If you choose to display an attribute class, it will always 

be displayed on each item that has an attribute of that class. Similarly, if you 

choose not to display an attribute class, it will not be displayed on any of the items 

on the chart. Unlike hidden items, attribute classes that are not shown can still be 

searched for. 

How do I hide an attribute? 

There are two other selection sets on the chart. Selection Set 1 contains 

Card no: 4587 - 9083 and Selection Set 2 contains FARMER and Room 203. The 

items in each of these selection sets are displayed with a selection set attribute. 

You want the items to be visible but you do not want the selection set attributes to 

be visible when you present your chart, so hide the attributes. To do this: 


dialog, and select Definitions\Attribute Classes to display the Attribute 

Classes page: 


Showing Attributes 

2. Hold down the Ctrl key and select Selection Set 1, then, while still holding down 

the Ctrl key, click on Selection Set 2 to select it. Click Properties to display the 

Edit Attribute Classes dialog: 

3. Turn off the Show On Chart check box and click OK to return to the Chart 

Properties dialog. 



Return 



to Heathrow. 


25 Feb 2006 22:30 


The attributes for Selection Set 1 and Selection Set 2 are no longer displayed on 

the chart: 


credit card 

Card no: 4587 - 9083 






A 1 5 

Officer 

27 Feb 2006 13:25 







A 1 5 

Officer 

01 Mar 2006 17:37 







How do I display attributes that are not visible on a chart? 

The three Male theme lines have attributes for Nationality and Date of Birth but 

these are not displayed on the chart. To show these attributes on the chart: 


dialog, and select Definitions\Attribute Classes to display the Attribute 

Classes page: 



2. Select the Nationality and Date of Birth attribute classes and click 

Properties. The Edit Attribute Classes dialog is displayed: 

Note: The Text page of the Edit Attribute Classes dialog applies to the 

Nationality attribute as it is of type Text. The Date & Time page applies 

to the Date of Birth attribute as it is of type Date & Time. 

3. On the Text page, turn on the Show On Chart check box. 

4. Click the Date & Time tab to display the Date & Time page, and turn on the 

Show On Chart check box. 

5. Click OK to close this dialog and return to the Chart Properties dialog. 




The theme lines relating to people are displayed with Nationality and Date of Birth 

attributes: 

Sam STEELE 

17 Sep 1960 

British 

Paul SHARP 

17 Jun 1967 

British 

Danny KENT 

01 May 1966 

British 




Changing the Size of an Icon 5.5 

When you create a chart, you can choose to emphasize certain aspects of it by 

changing the size of icons. For example, you may have a suspect who is the center 

of an investigation. If you want this suspect to stand out from the rest of your chart 

you could change the size of the icon so that it is larger than the other icons on 

your chart. 

Note: If you are presenting a chart in court, it is inadvisable to change the size of 

individual icons so that they stand out from the rest of the chart. 

How do I change the size of an icon? 

The icons for Marc BAKER and Arcacia Investments are double the size of any of 

the other icons on the chart. You are going to present this chart in court, therefore 

all of the icons need to be the same size so that individual icons do not stand out. 

Change the size of both of these icons so that they are displayed at normal size. To 

do this: 

1. Select Marc BAKER and Arcacia Investments, right-click on one of them and, 

from the shortcut menu, select Combined Properties and then 

Style\Icons\Type to display the Type page of the Edit Chart Item dialog: 


Changing the Size of an Icon 

2. In the Icon Enlargement drop-down list, notice that these icons are currently 

enlarged to x2 Double. Select x1 Normal from this list so that these icons are 

displayed at their normal size. 

3. Click OK to close the Edit Chart Item dialog. 

The icons for both Marc BAKER and Arcacia Investments are displayed at normal 

size on the chart. Your chart should now look similar to that below: 

Danny KENT 

British 

01 May 1966 





Marc BAKER 

Departure 




A 1 5 

Record 

24 Feb 2006 08:30 


456 FGT 

Black Saab


Changing the Shading Color of an Icon 5.6 

Icon color 

shading for 

individual 

entities with 

different 

representations 

You can shade the icons on your chart with a specific color. This is useful if you 

want to bring some realism to your charts, that is, to show the icons with the colors 

more as they appear in real life. For example, you can display a green truck, a 

black suitcase, and pink house on your chart. 

Before shading After shading 

Icon shading can be applied to individual entities, and to entity types so that all 

entities added to the chart of a particular type use the same color shading. Color 

shading applies to entities that are represented as icons, and theme lines and 

event frames that display icons. The following chart example shows how icon color 

shading could be used in your charts. 

12 High Street 

Little Rock 

Sighting 

Passenger pickup 

Suspect seen leaving 12 

High Street, Little Rock in a 

yellow cab. 

05 Apr 2006 05:30 

Passenger setdow n 

Suspect seen arriving at 

210 Green Street, St 

Savior in yelllow cab. 

05 Apr 2006 06:46 

Sighting 

Traveled from 

Traveled to 

Cab 124 RST 

Traveled in 

Anonymous Person 

Traveled in 

Cab 456 DFG 

Icon shading 

for an entity 

type called 

Yellow Cab 


Changing the Shading Color of an Icon 

How do I change the shading color of an icon? 

The icon for the 456 FGT Black Saab displays a blue color taken from the standard 

color defined for the Car entity type. Change the icon shading color for this entity to 

black to reflect the known color for this car. To do this: 

1. Press the F4 key to display the Find Text dialog. 

2. Type black in the Find box, and click OK to start the search. A message is 

displayed. 

3. Click OK to close the message, and click the Fit Selection in Window toolbar 

button to display the matching item, 456 FGT Black Saab, in the full window. 

4. Right-click on 456 FGT Black Saab, and from the shortcut menu, select Edit 

Item Properties to display the Edit Icon dialog. 

5. Select Style\Type to display the Type page of the Edit Icon dialog. 



6. Click on the drop-down arrow of the Shade Color drop-down list and select 

Black. 

7. Click OK to close the Edit Icon dialog. 

The icon for 456 FGT Black Saab is now displayed with a black shading color. 

456 FGT 

Black Saab 



Editing the Legend 

Editing the Legend 5.7 

The legend acts as a key to all of the items on a chart. You can choose which items 

you want to be displayed on the legend. This is particularly useful if you have 

hidden items on a chart, or if you have displayed items that were previously 

hidden. 

You can add and remove entries from a legend. 

How do I delete a legend entry? 

Your chart already contains a legend: 


Top Secret 

Male 

Airport 

Credit 

General 

Convenor 

Traveled 

Cruiser 

Port 

Surv eillance 

Confidential 

Sighting 



Organization 

Female 

Bar 

Owner 

Restricted 

Car 

Telephone 

Meeting 

Attendee 

Associates


This legend currently shows the selection sets that you have just hidden. It does 

not contain entries for the Nationality and Date of Birth attribute classes that you 

have chosen to show. Edit the legend to remove any reference to selection sets 

and add entries for the two attributes. To do this: 

1. Double-click on the legend to display the Edit Legend dialog: 

2. The three selection set attributes are displayed at the top of the table. Click on 

the first entry (Top Secret) and, while holding down the Shift key, click on the 

last selection set entry (Restricted). All of the selection sets will be selected. 

3. Click Delete to remove them from the legend. 

Do not close the Edit Legend dialog. 



How do I add an entry to the legend? 

Add an entry for each of the Nationality and Date of Birth attributes that are now 

displayed on your chart. To do this: 

1. Click Attribute to display the Add Legend Attribute Entry dialog: 

2. In the Description box, type Date of Birth. 

3. In the Symbol drop-down list, select the first Attribute. 

4. Press the B key to move to those Attributes beginning with b, and select 

bluedot. 

5. Click OK to close the Add Legend Attribute Entry dialog. 

6. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to add an entry for the Nationality attribute. Press the 

underscore key (_) and select _suspct2 from the Symbol drop-down list. 

7. Click OK to close the Add Legend Attribute Entry dialog. 

8. Click OK to close the Edit Legend dialog. 



The legend now contains entries for the Nationality and Date of Birth attributes. 

The entries for the selection sets have been removed: 


Male 

Airport 

Credit 

General 

Convenor 

Date of Birth 

Traveled 

Cruiser 

Port 

Surv eillance 

Sighting 


Nationality 

Organization 

Female 

Bar 

Owner 

Telephone 

Meeting 

Attendee 

Associates 

i2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 User Guide: Customizing & Analyzing 143 

Car


MOONSHADOW 

Sam STEELE 

British 

17 Sep 1960 

Paul SHARP 

British 

17 Jun 1967 

Danny KENT 

B ritish 

01 May 2006 






A 1 5 

Officer 

20 Feb 2006 18:08 


Arcacia Investments Marc BAKER 


Monday 20th February 2006 Friday 24th February 2006 Saturday 25th February 2006 Saturday 25th February 2006 Saturday 25th February 2006 Sunday 26th February 2006 Monday 27th February 2006 Wednesday 1st March 2006 

13:00 14:00 15:00 

12:00 15:00 18:00 

06:00 09:00 12:00 13:30 15:00 16:30 18:00 19:10 20:00 21:00 

06:00 08:00 12:00 

14:00 15:00 16:00 19:00 20:00 21:00 

00 12:00 

16:00 17:40 

17:00 

21st 12:00 

22nd 12:00 

23rd 09:00 21:00 

00:00 03:00 00:00 22:00 

03:00 22:00 00:00 06:00 17:00 

18:00 00:00 12:00 

12:00 

18:00 00:00 

March 

12:00 18:00 

Departure 




A 1 5 

Record 

24 Feb 2006 08:30 


456 FGT 

Black Saab 

Observed 




A 1 5 

Witness 

24 Feb 2006 13:14 






followed. 

A 1 5 

25 Feb 2006 11:52 

Save your chart, but do not close it. 


Witness 


Seen moored 


A 1 5 

Witness 

25 Feb 2006 19:02 

Return 



to Heathrow. 


25 Feb 2006 22:30 


credit card 

Card no: 4587 - 9083 

Departure 





A 1 5 

Record 

26 Feb 2006 08:30 






A 1 5 

Officer 

27 Feb 2006 13:25 

Port 

Vessel was 

seen moored 



previous 

sighting. 

27 Feb 2006 18:30 






A 1 5 

Officer 

01 Mar 2006 17:37 







Airport 

Credit Surv eillance 

General 

Convenor 

Date of Birth 

Traveled 

Port 

Sighting 


Nationality 

Female 

Bar 

Owner 

Telephone 

Meeting 

A ttendee 

Associates


Preparing to Print a Chart 5.8 

We recommend that you follow the steps below when printing a chart: 

• specify the printer you wish to print the chart to 

Select a printer to print a chart to. When you select a printer you can also set 

the properties for the printer. 

• specify the page settings 

The chart's printed appearance depends on the properties that you have set for 

the printer and the way in which the page is set up. Page setup allows you to 

set any of the following options when setting up a printer to print your chart to: 

— paper size, such as letter, A4 and so on 

— paper orientation: landscape or portrait 

— page margins 

— the number of pages the chart will be printed over (scaling) 

— center the chart on the page 

— items that span two separate pages are printed with an overlap 

— borders and background colors 

— print theme line names with a set width on every page 

— print the Time Bar on every page 

— print chart properties, including page numbers, in the headers and footers 

There are a number of reasons why you should set up your pages before 

printing a chart: 

— the page size varies between different printers 

— if you change your chosen printer you will have to setup pages again 

— if you receive a chart from someone else, you may have to setup the pages 

again to print on your chosen printer 

• view page boundaries 

Page boundaries displays lines on your chart indicating the edges of each 

page. This enables you to check where your page breaks are located before 

printing your chart. 


Preparing to Print a Chart 

The page boundary is displayed on the chart as a gray rectangle. Chart items 

within the rectangle will be printed, chart items that are not within the rectangle 

will not be printed. If the page boundaries do not represent how you want to 

print your chart you should change the page setup settings. 

Note: When you use the Page Setup dialog to specify page settings, the page 

boundary is temporarily displayed to help you adjust the scaling so that 

all items are displayed within the page boundary. 

In the example chart below, the page boundaries show how the chart will be 

printed. The chart will be printed on two landscape pages; the split between 

the two pages is shown on the chart as a broken line. 

Meeting starts 

Meeting between Kent 

CORNEY and Kevin DUPLEASE 

starts. 

A 1 5 

Witness DFG 0989/1a 

01 Jan 2006 10:30 

Associates 

Kent CORNEY Kevin DUPLEASE 

• print the chart 

Telephone call 

Kent CORNEY is seen 

making a call from a 

payphone in the hotel. 

A 1 5 

Officer SA 90738 

01 Jan 2006 10:50 

David YOUNG 

The chart is printed on your chosen printer. If it is not printed exactly as you 

want it, for example not all of the chart is printed, or it is printed on too many 

pages, you will need to change the printer setup and page layout settings. 

When printing a chart it is important that you follow the above steps in order. If, for 

example, you receive a chart from another user who has used a printer that you do 

not have access to, you will need to choose another printer. You will then need to 

set the printer properties and the page setup so that it is printed in the required 

style. 


Subscriber 

174 579 5487 

CORNEY receives package 

Kent CORNEY receives package. 

This package wqas delivered by 

an unknown male on a 

motorcycle. 

A 1 5 

Witness 

GQF879072 

01 Jan 2006 11:45 

License plate: 474 TRL 

Package handed to DUPLEASE 

Kent CORNEY hands Kevin 

DUPLEASE the package in 

exchange for an envelope, 

believed to contain money. 

A 1 5 

Record 

HLK 9098/a1 

01 Jan 2006 12:00 

Meeting ends 

Kent CORNEY and Kevin 

DUPLEASE leave 

separately. 

A 1 5 

Witness Waitress 

01 Jan 2006 12:15

How do I choose a printer? 


Before you can print your chart you must first choose a printer. To do this: 

1. From the File menu, select Print. This displays the Print dialog. 

2. In the Printer area, from the drop-down list, select the appropriate printer. 

3. Click OK to close the Print dialog. 



How do I setup pages for printing? 

When you have chosen a printer you should set up the pages, for example so that 

the chart is printed on the correct paper size, orientation, and number of pages. 

You want to print this chart on two landscape pages, side-by-side. You will need to 

specify the number of pages and then scale the content of your chart to fit the 

paper. To do this: 

1. From the File menu, select Page Setup to display the Page Setup dialog: 

2. Make sure that Page is displayed. 

3. In the Orientation area select Landscape. 

4. To specify that you want the chart to be printed on two landscape pages, side 

by side, in the Scaling area: 

a. Set the value in the Page(s) Wide by box to be 2. 

b. Set the value in the Page(s) Tall box to be 1. 

c. Click Adjust and from the drop-down list, select Scale. 

5. You also want to print the chart in the center of the page, so make sure that in 

the Placement area the Center Chart on Paper check box is turned on. 

Do not close the Page Setup dialog. 


How do I set the size of the page margins? 


When your chart is printed you want it to have a large margin at each side and top 

and bottom of the paper. To do this: 

1. Click the Margins tab to display the Margins page: 

2. To create wide margins, enter the width of the margin required in each of the 

boxes, or click on the up/down arrows on each box to increase or decrease the 

margin. The graphic on his page will illustrate the change to the page layout. 

a. In the Top box, set the margin to be 1.5 inches (3.75 centimeters) 

b. In the Left box, set the margin to be 2 inches (5 centimeters) 

c. In the Right box, set the margin to be 2 inches (5 centimeters) 

d. In the Bottom box, set the margin to be 1.5 inches (3.75 centimeters) 

Do not close the Page Setup dialog. 



How do I print theme line names on each page? 

When you print this chart, you want the theme line names to be printed at the edge 

of each page with a set width, and the time bar to be printed at the top of each 

page. The display of the Time Bar and Theme Line Names is set in the Annotation 

page. To do this: 

1. Click the Annotation tab to display the Annotation page: 

2. Turn on the Time Bar check box. You want the time bar to be printed on each 

page so turn on the Every Page check box. 

3. You want the theme line names to be printed on each page; turn on the Theme 

Line Names check box, then turn on the Every Page check box. 

4. You want the theme line names to be printed with a set width of 1 inch (2.55 

centimeters); in the Width box, set the width to be 1 inch (2.55 centimeters). 


How do I print headers and footers? 


When you print this chart, you want to print the page numbers in the bottom right 

corner of every page, and print the title and classification custom property in the 

chart header. To do this: 

1. Click the Header and Footer tab to display the Header and Footer page. 

2. Click on the drop-down arrow of the bottom center drop-down list and select 

(none), to turn off the printing of page numbers in the center position of the 

page footers. 

3. Click on the drop-down arrow of the bottom right drop-down list and select 

Page 1 of 2, to turn on the printing of page numbers in the right position of the 

page footers. 



The central example area of the Header and Footer page shows the new 

position where the page numbers will be printed. 

4. Click on the drop-down arrow of the top left drop-down list and select Title to 

print the chart title in the left position of the page headers. 

5. Click on the drop-down arrow of the top right drop-down list and select 

Classification to print the classification custom property in the right position of 

the page headers. The completed Header and Footer page should look like 

this: 


MOONSHADOW 

Sam STEELE 

British 

17 S ep 1960 

Paul SHARP 

British 

17 Jun 1967 

Danny KENT 

British 

01 May 2006 






A 1 5 

Officer 

20 Feb 2006 18:08 




6. As you have adjusted the margins and added a header and footer, it is 

necessary to scale the chart again. To do this, click the Page tab and, in the 

Scaling area, select Scale from the Adjust drop-down list. 

7. Click OK to close the Page Setup dialog. 

The chart is now displayed showing page boundaries. The page boundaries 

show how your chart will be printed and are displayed as gray rectangles on 

your chart. In this example your chart will be printed on 2 pages (1 page tall by 

2 pages wide) 

Observed 




A 1 5 

Witness 

24 Feb 2006 13:14 

Departure 




A 1 5 

Record 

24 Feb 2006 08:30 


456 FGT 

Black Saab 






followed. 

A 1 5 

Witness 

25 Feb 2006 11:52 


Seen moored 


A 1 5 

Witness 

25 Feb 2006 19:02 

Return 



to Heathrow. 


25 Feb 2006 22:30 

How do I turn off the display of page boundaries? 

You can turn off the display of page boundaries on your chart at any time. 

To do this, click the Page Boundaries toolbar button. Your chart will be displayed 

without page boundaries. 

How do I print a chart? 

When you have set up your chart for printing you can print it. It will be printed on 

the printer that you selected in the Printer Setup dialog according to the settings in 

the Page Setup dialog. It will be printed on the number of pages that it was 

adjusted to when you applied the Print layout. To print this chart, click the Print 

toolbar button. 

When you have printed your chart, click the Save toolbar button, and close your 

chart. 


credit card 

Card no: 4587 - 9083 

Departure 





A 1 5 

Record 

26 Feb 2006 08:30 






A 1 5 

Officer 

27 Feb 2006 13:25 

Port 

Vessel was 

seen moored 



previous 

sighting. 

27 Feb 2006 18:30 






A 1 5 

Officer 

01 Mar 2006 17:37 






Date of Birth 

Nationality 




General 

Sighting 

Attendee 

Convenor Telephone Call A ssociates 

Traveled 

Owner 


Summary 

Summary 5.9 


• use selection sets 

• show and hide information 

• change the size of an icon 

• change the shading color of an icon 

• edit the chart legend 

• prepare a chart for printing 

• print a chart 


Using Background Items 

6 

This example explains how you can add an item as a background item. It also 

demonstrates how you can create snapshots and use them when presenting 

charts. 

Contents 


Using a Background Item as a Watermark 157 

Using Background Items 160 

Using Snapshots to Build Up a Presentation 164 

Summary 173 


Introduction 



Scenario 


• adding a background item as a watermark 

• adding toolbar buttons to a new toolbar 

• adding a background item, but not as a watermark 

• creating snapshots 

• presenting snapshots 



page 17. 

You can see the finished charts (Example 6 finished 1.anb and Example 6 

finished 2.anb) at any time while you are working through this example. To 

access the folder in which these charts are stored, double-click on the User Guide 


Notebook 7 folder, and double-click on the User Guide - Customizing and 


A chart exists showing the happenings that took place when FARMER made a call 

to his supplier during the first meeting with the undercover officer. This chart is only 

a draft and you want to show this using a watermark. 

A second chart exists showing a series of happenings relating to the cruiser 

MOONSHADOW and the three suspects, STEELE, SHARP and KENT. 

You have received further information that MOONSHADOW has been sighted on 

three separate occasions between 25 February and 27 February 2006 in and 

around the bays in St Lucia. 

You are going to present the sightings of MOONSHADOW around St Lucia as a 

slide show using Analyst’s Notebook presentation tools. 


Chapter 6: Using Background Items 

Using a Background Item as a Watermark 6.2 

In Analyst’s Notebook, you can choose to display an item as a background item. 

Any chart item can be made into a background item, including all entity 

representations and link types. 

For further information on background items, refer to Using Background Items on 

page 160. 

How do I add a background item as a watermark? 




investigation 



forgery. 

A chart already exists showing the happenings that took place when FARMER 

called his supplier from a payphone in the station lobby. You want to present this 

chart with a watermark in the chart background to show that it is a draft chart. To 

do this: 

1. Open the chart Example 6 initial 1.anb. To access the folder in which 

this chart is stored, double-click on the User Guide Example Material shortcut 

in the My Documents\i 2\i 2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 folder, and doubleclick 


Mr STEELE 

English 

Address 


Crownsville 

UK 


on vessel 

Associates 

MOONSHADOW 

White 

UK Registered 

Stuart WRIGHT 

English 


456 FGT 


Owner 


Marc BAKER 

English 

Subscriber 

02703 871 117 

Station Lobby 


Diverts to 

Called 

RP3 

Mailing Address Called RZ/6 

Called 

RP1 

RP2 

Box 518 

Finchley Road 

Crownsville 

UK 

Called 

RP4 

Subscriber 


1 

07786 162 534 

07787 563 412 

No subscriber 

details available

Using a Background Item as a Watermark 

2. Save this file; from the File menu, select Save As. Click OK on the Cover 


save your charts in. Type Example 6 backgrounds.anb in the File Name 

box and click Save. 

3. Click the drop-down arrow on the Insert OLE Object toolbar button, and select 

Documents ➧ Picture to select the Picture type. The Insert Object dialog is 

displayed: 

4. Select Create from File and then click Browse to locate the file that you will 

use as the background of your chart (Example 6 draft.bmp). To access the 

folder in which this file is stored, double-click on the User Guide Example 

Material shortcut in the My Documents\i 2\i 2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 

folder, and double-click on the User Guide - Customizing and 


5. Click Open to return to the Insert Object dialog, then click OK to add the picture 

to the chart. 

6. The picture is placed on top of your chart, obscuring the other chart items. 

Move it to place it roughly in the center of the chart. 

7. Turn off the Label display; right-click on the picture, and from the shortcut 

menu, select Display ➧ Label. 

8. To place this object in the background of the chart, select it and from the View 

menu, select Make Background. 

Note: Watermarks, or other background items that will lie under other chart 

items, are best made using pale colors so that they do not distract from 

the foreground items. 





investigation 



forgery. 


Your chart should now look similar to that below (Example 6 finished 1.anb): 

Mr STEELE 

English 

Address 


Crownsville 

UK 


on vessel 

Associates 

MOONSHADOW 

White 

UK Registered 

Stuart WRIGHT 

English 

Save and close this chart. 


456 FGT 


Owner 


Marc BAKER 

English 

Subscriber 

02703 871 117 

Station Lobby 


Diverts to 

Called 

RP3 

Mailing Address Called RZ/6 

Called 

RP1 

RP2 

Box 518 

Finchley Road 

Crownsville 

UK 

Called 

RP4 

Subscriber 


1 

07786 162 534 

07787 563 412 

No subscriber 

details available


Using Background Items 6.3 

Murder Investigation 

DISCOUNT 

A background item is an item that is placed, as its name suggests, in the chart 

background. Background items are useful when creating charts for presentation 

purposes. 

Typical background items are: 

• floorplan 

• map 

• watermark 

• scene of crime diagram 

• organizational crest or logo 

When an item is placed in the chart background you can add items to the chart and 

place them on top of it. This is particularly useful if you are presenting evidence 

that depicts the location of a suspect or a commodity. 

In the example chart below, all of the happenings surrounding the discovery of a 

body at Discount Warehouse are shown. A floorplan of the warehouse is used as a 

background item, to represent the scene of the crime, and the happenings are 

placed on or around it: 

Shot heard 

11 Jul 2006 

02:58 

Observed leaving 

Discount Warehouse 

11 Jul 2006 02:59 

Unknown Male 

Mortuary 

Police receive call 

11 Jul 2006 03:00 

Body removed for autopsy 

Officer arrives at 

scene of crime 

11 Jul 2006 03:30 

Body found in plant 

(appears to have been shot) 

Forensic Evidence 

Concierge 


A background item cannot be selected, moved, edited or deleted like a normal 

chart item, but it can be made into a foreground item which will allow you to 

perform these actions. 


Body 

Body discovered 

11 Jul 2006 03:35 

Forensics arrive at 


11 Jul 2006 04:30 

Fingerprints Cannabis Handgun 

MD's Office 

Evidence discovered 

Between 04:30 and 

06:30 

Evidence Discovered 

Plant Plant Manager 

PA's Office 

Forensics leave 


11 Jul 2006 06:30 

Forensic Evidence 

sent to laboratory 

Medical Laboratory

How do I add an OLE object as a background item? 


A chart exists that contains three sightings of MOONSHADOW in and around 

Castries bay between 25 February 2006 and 27 February 2006. You want to 

present this chart using a map of St Lucia to show the location of MOONSHADOW 

for each of the sightings. Add a map of St Lucia as a background item. To do this: 

1. Open the chart Example 6 initial 2.anb: 

MOONSHADOW 

Sam STEELE 

British 

17 Sep 1960 

Paul SHARP 

British 

17 Jun 1967 

Danny KENT 

British 

01 May 2006 






A 1 5 

Officer 

20 Feb 2006 18:08 



Observed 




A 1 5 

Witness 

24 Feb 2006 13:14 

Departure 




A 1 5 

Record 

24 Feb 2006 08:30 


456 FGT 

Black Saab 






followed. 

A 1 5 

Witness 

25 Feb 2006 11:52 



save your charts in. Type Example 6 snapshots.anb in the File Name box 


3. Click the drop-down arrow on the Insert OLE Object toolbar button, and select 

Documents ➧ Picture to select the Picture type. 

4. In the Insert Object dialog, select Create from File, and then click Browse to 

locate the map of St Lucia, Example 6 Castries.bmp. 

To access the folder in which this file is stored, double-click on the User Guide 


Notebook 7 folder, and double-click on the User Guide - Customizing 

and Analyzing folder. 

5. Click OK to close the Insert Object dialog. 


Seen moored 

in Castries 

harbor. 

A 1 5 

Witness 

25 Feb 2006 19:02 

Return 



to Heathrow. 


25 Feb 2006 22:30 


credit card 

Sighted at Sea 

Vessel was sighted at sea 

around 10 miles off Castries. 

Details as to when it sailed are 

not known. 

A 1 5 

26 Feb 2006 12:23 

6. The map of St Lucia is placed on your chart. Move the map so that it is placed 

above the MOONSHADOW theme line, above the Moored in Port, Sighted at 

Sea, and Port event frames. 

7. Turn off the Label display; right-click on the picture, and from the shortcut 

menu, select Display ➧ Label. 

Card no: 4587 - 9083 

Departure 





A 1 5 

Record 

26 Feb 2006 08:30 

In Port 

Vessel was 

seen moored 



previous 

sighting. 

27 Feb 2006 18:30 






A 1 5 

Officer 

27 Feb 2006 13:25 






A 1 5 

Officer 

01 Mar 2006 17:37 






Date of Birth 

Nationality 




General 

Sighting 

A ttendee 

Convenor Telephone C all Associates 

Traveled 

Owner 




MOONSHADOW 

Sandra CASTE 

Associates 

Sam STEELE 

British 

17 Sep 1960 

Paul SHARP 

British 

17 Jun 1967 

Danny KENT 

British 

01 M ay 2006 






A 1 5 

Officer 

20 Feb 2006 18:08 




The map of St Lucia is placed in the chart foreground. If you click on it you will be 

able to move it or edit its properties. You want this map to be at a constant place on 

the chart so that you can add information concerning the sightings of 

MOONSHADOW to it. Make it a background item. To do this, select the map, and 

from the View menu, select Make Background. 

The map becomes a background item and you will no longer be able to move or 

edit it. 

MOONSHADOW was first observed in the bay at Castries in the evening of 

25 February 2006. Add an icon to show this on the map. To do this: 

1. Click the Zoom to Area toolbar button, then click on the map of St Lucia so that 

you can clearly see it. 


Associates 


Observed 




A 1 5 

Witness 

24 Feb 2006 13:14 

Departure 




A 1 5 

Record 

24 Feb 2006 08:30 


456 FGT 

Black Saab 






followed. 

A 1 5 

Witness 

25 Feb 2006 11:52 

How do I make an item a background item? 


Seen moored 

in Castries 

harbor. 

A 1 5 

Witness 

25 Feb 2006 19:02 

Return 



to Heathrow. 


25 Feb 2006 22:30 


credit card 





not known. 

A 1 5 

26 Feb 2006 12:23 

Card no: 4587 - 9083 

Departure 





A 1 5 

Record 

26 Feb 2006 08:30 

How do I add an item on top of a background item? 

In Port 

Vessel was 

seen moored 



previous 

sighting. 

27 Feb 2006 18:30 






A 1 5 

Officer 

27 Feb 2006 13:25 






A 1 5 

Officer 

01 Mar 2006 17:37 






Date of Birth 

Nationality 



Credit Surv eillance Bar Meeting 

General 

Sighting 

Attendee 

Convenor Telephone Call Associates 

Traveled 

Owner


2. Click the drop-down arrow on the Insert Icon toolbar button, and select 

Transport ➧ Cruiser to select the Cruiser type from the Transport palette. 

3. Place this icon in the mouth of Castries Bay and add the following information 

to it: 

Label MOONSHADOW 

Date & Time 25 Feb 2006 19:02 

Note: You will need to turn on the Label is Different From Identity check box 

before you can add the label. 

4. Change the default style of icons so that the date and time and description are 

displayed along with the label. How to do this is described in Analyst’s 

Notebook 7 User Guide: Creating Charts. 



Seen moored 

in Castries 

harbor. 


A 1 5 

Witness 

25 Feb 2006 19:02 

MOONSHADOW 

25 Feb 2006 19:02 





not known. 

A 1 5 

26 Feb 2006 12:23 

Vessel was 

seen moored 



previous 

sighting. 

27 Feb 2006 18:30 


In Port

Using Snapshots to Build Up a Presentation 

Using Snapshots to Build Up a Presentation 6.4 

A snapshot is a view of a chart, preserving the position of chart items and the 

display scale. You can capture several snapshots to build a series. Snapshots are 

useful if you are presenting a series of happenings, for example to demonstrate the 

locations of persons or commodities over a period of time. 

The example below shows the location of Kevin DUPLEASE, a known drugs 

dealer, at various times during a surveillance operation. He was first seen on 23 

February 2006 at 19:00 in a bar in New York, where he handed a package to an 

unknown male in return for cash. Subsequent sightings saw him in Washington, 

where, once again, he exchanged a package in return for money, and in Miami 

where he handed money to a known drugs importer, Kent CORNEY, in exchange 

for a package. You could use a series of snapshots to present this information. 

Snapshot 1 Sighting of Kevin DUPLEASE and an unknown male in New York on 23 February 

2006. 


Package 

Money 

New York 

Unknown male 

Kevin DUPLEASE 

Seen in bar in New Washington York. Handed 

a package to an unknown male 

who in return gave him money. 

23 Feb 2006 19:00 

Miami


Snapshot 2 Sighting of Kevin DUPLEASE and an unknown male in Washington on 

24 February 2006. 

Snapshot 3 Sighting of Kevin DUPLEASE and Kent CORNEY in Miami on 26 February 2006. 

You can create as many snapshots as you wish. 

When you save your chart all of the snapshots are saved with it. The next time you 

open it, you will be able to restore the snapshots. 

Package 

Money 

Washington 

Unknown male 


Seen in bar in Washington. 

Handed another unknown male 

package in return for money. 

24 Feb 2006 20:30 

Package 


Miami 

Washington 

New York 

New York 

Money 

Miami 

Kent CORNEY 


Meeting in Miami. Handed cash 

to Kent CORNEY in exchange for 

a parcel, believed to contain 

drugs. 

26 Feb 2006 18:25


How do I add buttons to a toolbar? 

When you present this chart it will be presented so that it is visible in the entire 

window. This means that the application toolbar will not be visible and you will not 

be able to see the snapshots toolbar buttons. Create a new toolbar containing just 

the buttons that relate to snapshots and that will remain visible when you view the 

chart in the entire window. To do this: 

1. From the Tools menu, select Options, then select Toolbars\Edit to display the 

Toolbar Edit page of the Options dialog: 

2. In the Categories list, select View to display all of the toolbar buttons that are 

contained in the View toolbar. 



3. Click on a button. A description of the button is displayed in the Description 

area. 

4. Drag the Snapshots toolbar button from the Options dialog to the chart area. A 

new toolbar is created. 

5. Drag the Previous Snapshot and Next Snapshot toolbar buttons onto the 

new toolbar. 

6. Click OK to close the Options dialog. 

You will now have a toolbar that contains the three buttons that are used for 

snapshots. This toolbar is floating and not docked. 

How do I take a snapshot of a chart? 

During the investigation, MOONSHADOW was seen at several points around St 

Lucia. The first sighting was on 25 February 2006 at 19:02, which you added to 

your chart in the previous part of this example. Take a snapshot of this chart. 

Before you take the snapshot move the event frame Moored in Port so that it is in a 

more prominent position on the chart. To do this: 

1. Drag the Moored in Port event frame up so that it is positioned in line with 

MOONSHADOW on the chart. 



2. On your new toolbar, click the Snapshots button. The Snapshots dialog is 

displayed: 

3. Click Capture. 

4. The chart is saved as a snapshot, which appears at the top of the list. 



5. Double-click in the Name column and type MOONSHADOW sighting 25 Feb 

2006, 19:02, to make the name of this snapshot more meaningful. 

6. Click OK to close the Snapshots dialog. 

7. Move the event frame Moored in Port back to its original position on the chart. 

8. Hide MOONSHADOW. How to do this is described in How do I hide items on a 

chart? on page 128. 

Creating further snapshots 

MOONSHADOW was sighted for a second time, in the early afternoon of 

26 February 2006, ten miles off the coast of Castries. Add a Cruiser icon to the 

chart to show this information and move the Sighted at Sea event frame so that it is 

in a more prominent position on the chart. To do this: 

1. Click the drop-down arrow on the Insert Icon toolbar button, and from the list of 

most recently used icons, select the Cruiser icon. 

2. Place this icon so that it is positioned about ten miles off the coast of Castries 

bay, and add the following information to it: 


Date & Time 26 Feb 2006 12:23 

Description Sighted ten miles off the coast of Castries. 

3. Drag the Sighted at Sea event frame up so that it lines up with 

MOONSHADOW. 

4. Click the Snapshots toolbar button to display the Snapshots dialog and click 

Capture to capture the chart. 

5. A second snapshot is created. Edit the name of this snapshot to be 

MOONSHADOW sighting 26 Feb 2006, 12:23. 


7. Hide MOONSHADOW once again and move the Sighted at Sea event frame 

back to its original position. 



8. MOONSHADOW was seen for a third time on the 27 February 2006, in the bay 

at Castries. Add another Cruiser icon to the chart and add the following 

information to it: 


Date & Time 27 Feb 2006 18:30 

Description The vessel was seen in the bay at Castries in the 

early evening. 

9. Move the event frame In Port up so that it is in line with MOONSHADOW. 

10. Take a third snapshot, edit its name to be MOONSHADOW sighting 27 Feb 

2006, 18:30. 

11. Hide MOONSHADOW and move the In Port event frame so that it is placed at 

it original position on the chart. 



How do I view snapshots? 


You now have three snapshots showing the three different sightings of 

MOONSHADOW. When you present this chart you will show each snapshot in 

turn, one after the other. To do this: 

1. Click the Snapshots toolbar button. This will display the Snapshots dialog. The 

three snapshots that you have just taken are listed in the dialog. Select 

MOONSHADOW sighting 25 Feb 2006, 19:02 and click Restore. This will 

display the first sighting of MOONSHADOW on 25 February 2006. 

W 


Seen moored 

in Castries 

harbor. 

A 1 5 

Witness 

25 Feb 2006 19:02 


MOONSHADOW 

25 Feb 2006 19:02 





not known. 

A 1 5 

26 Feb 2006 12:23 

In Port 

Vessel was 

seen moored 



previous 

sighting. 

27 Feb 2006 18:30 

3. Press the F8 key. The chart is displayed in the full screen. The toolbar 

containing all of the Snapshot toolbar buttons is also visible. 



W 

4. Click the Next Snapshot toolbar button. The second sighting of 

MOONSHADOW on 26 February is displayed. 


Seen moored 

in Castries 

harbor. 

5. Click the Next Snapshot toolbar button again. The third sighting of 

MOONSHADOW on 27 February 2006 is displayed. 

6. Press the F8 key again to display the chart in the chart window again, then 

save and close your chart. 


A 1 5 

Witness 

25 Feb 2006 19:02 


Seen moored 

in Castries 

harbor. 

A 1 5 

Witness 

25 Feb 2006 19:02 

MOONSHADOW 

Sighted ten miles off 

the coast of Castries. 

26 Feb 2006 12:23 





not known. 

A 1 5 

26 Feb 2006 12:23 

MOONSHADOW 

The vessel was seen in 

the bay at Castries in 

the early evening. 

27 Feb 2006 18:30 





not known. 

A 1 5 

26 Feb 2006 12:23 

In Port 

Vessel was 

seen moored 



previous 

sighting. 

27 Feb 2006 18:30 

In Port 

Vessel was 

seen moored 



previous 

sighting. 

27 Feb 2006 18:30


Summary 6.5 


• add a background item as a watermark 

• add toolbar buttons to a new toolbar 

• create snapshots 

• present snapshots 


Summary 


7 

Analyzing a Chart by Sorting Items 

This example explains how you can analyze the contents of your chart using List 

Items. 

Contents 


About List Items 178 

Sorting Within a Table 193 

Analysis Attributes 198 

Copying Information from the List Items Dialog 202 

Sorting Theme Lines Within a Chart 204 

Summary 207 


Introduction 




• analyzing your chart using List Items 

• using analysis attributes to analyze your chart 

• customizing the columns that are displayed in the List Items dialog 

• copying information from the List Items dialog into another Windows application 

• performing a Theme Line layout 



page 17. 







Scenario 

Chapter 7: Analyzing a Chart by Sorting Items 

A chart containing a series of transactions between several accounts already 

exists. The transactions are check and credit card transactions between High 

Interest, Savings and Business accounts. 

You must now analyze this chart to see if any further information can be gleaned 

from it. You will also need to lay out your chart so that the theme lines are displayed 

in date order. 

Consider the following strategy to help you glean further information from the chart: 

• First of all, use List Items to see how you can select chart items on a chart. 

• Add and remove columns from the List Items dialog. This will allow you to see 

information about the accounts that may be more appropriate to your 

investigation. 

• Use analysis attributes in the List Items dialog to find out further information 

about the busiest accounts on the chart. You are particularly interested in any 

transactions that took place between accounts on a Friday, as you think this 

may be pertinent to your investigation. Find all of these transactions and copy 

them into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. Use the spreadsheet to find the total 

amount of all of these transactions. 

• Finally, lay out your chart so that the accounts on the chart are displayed with 

the busiest accounts at the top of the chart and the less busy accounts at the 

bottom of the chart. 


About List Items 

About List Items 7.2 

List Items enables you to view lists, in tabular form, of all of the entities and links on 

your chart. You can perform analysis on these lists by sorting, and adding to the 

columns in the lists. You can also remove columns that are of no interest. 

List Items lists all of the entities and links on a chart. If an item is selected in List 

Items it is selected on the chart: 

David GREEN 

3217-1997 0023-1455 

4546-4646 

Liz GREEN Dave LOCKE David YOUNG 

1058-4576 

0012-3963 


Tasha TAYLOR 5341-4723 

Marc BAKER 4550-0021 Susan KENT 

2359-6357 

1642-4551 

Danny KENT 

Judith LOCKE 

Anne JONES

David GREEN 

3217-1997 0023-1455 

4546-4646 


Similarly, if an item is selected on the chart it is selected in List Items: 

Liz GREEN Dave LOCKE David YOUNG 

1058-4576 

0012-3963 

Tasha TAYLOR 

5341-4723 

Marc BAKER 4550-0021 Susan KENT 

2359-6357 

1642-4551 

Danny KENT 

Judith LOCKE 

Anne JONES 



How do I use List Items? 

A chart already exists containing information relating to different bank accounts 

and the transactions between them. Open the List Items dialog and use it to find 

items on the chart. To do this: 

1. Open the chart Example 7 Account transactions.anb. To access the 

folder in which this chart is stored, double-click on the User Guide Example 

Material shortcut in the My Documents\i 2\i 2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 

folder, and double-click on the User Guide - Customizing and 


6729-3452 

21 Aug 1998 

8831-5529 

10 Mar 1997 


Compton 

0034-3498 

01 Jan 1997 

Stapleton 

Crownsv ille 

5610-0962 

03 Dec 1996 

Stapleton 

1217-2366 

13 Mar 1997 

Mallory 

3785-5515 

25 Mar 1994 

Crownsv ille 

4916-5428 

21 May 1998 

Stapleton 

8430-2253 

01 Mar 1996 

Compton 

1079-7367 

09 Oct 1995 

Crownsv ille 

4935-1288 

04 May 1989 

Mallory 

7855-5515 

01 Mar 1996 

Stapleton 

4553-1839 

03 Mar 1979 

Stapleton 

0457-1344 

15 Jun 1998 

Compton 

5594-8715 

10 Mar 1997 

Mallory 

2384-8847 

10 Sep 1998 

Stapleton 

4989-7999 

14 Sep 1998 

Crownsv ille 

4945-1221 

03 Dec 1996 

Mallory 

4546-4646 

03 Dec 1996 

Crownsv ille 

3995-6194 

10 Mar 1997 

Mallory 

8553-3667 

04 Jul 1996 

Stapleton 

3217-1997 

19 Dec 1996 

Compton 

2359-6356 

17 May 1998 

Compton 

9706-3911 

02 Apr 1998 

Crownsv ille 

4000 

50000 

48000 

45000 

40000 

15000 

17500 

12600 

13500 

12000 

1280 

170 

1630 

500 590 

500 

460 

1000 

300 

540 

200 

540 

90




save your charts in. Type Example 7 List Items.anb in the File Name 

box and click Save. 

3. From the Analysis menu, select List Items. Click the Entities tab to display 

the Entities page, if it is not already displayed: 

All of the entities on your chart are listed in the Entities page of the List Items 

dialog. 



How do I reset the columns displayed in the List Items dialog? 

When you open the List Items dialog, the selection and order of columns displayed 

is remembered from the last time you closed the dialog. You want to make sure 

that the default selection of columns is displayed in the correct order. To do this: 

1. Click Columns to display the Columns dialog, and click the General tab to 

display the General page: 

2. Click Reset. 

3. Reset the columns on the Attributes and Analysis Attributes pages using the 

same method. 


4. Click OK to close the Columns dialog. 


5. The List Items dialog is displayed with the default selection of columns 

displayed in the correct order. 

6. You also need to reset the columns on the Links page of the List Items dialog. 

To do this, Click the Links tab to display the Links page and repeat steps 1 to 4. 

7. Click the Entities tab to display the entities page. 

Do not close the List Items dialog. 



How do I resize the List Items dialog? 

The List Items dialog contains several columns, some of which you may not be 

able to see. Resize this dialog so that you can see as many columns as possible. 

To do this: 

1. Move your pointer over the bottom right corner of the dialog. The mouse pointer 

changes to indicate that the dialog can be resized: 

2. Hold down the left mouse button and drag down and to the right until you can 

see most of the columns in the table. 

3. Release the left mouse button. 

4. Select the following accounts: 

— 2359-6356 

— 3217-1997 

— 8553-3667 

— 9706-3911 

Note: Select the first account and then Ctrl and click to select the remaining 

three accounts. 

5. Click OK to close the List Items dialog. 



6. Click the Fit Selection in Window toolbar button. The accounts you selected in 

the List Items dialog are selected on your chart. 

8553-3667 

04 Jul 1996 

Stapleton 

3217-1997 

19 Dec 1996 

Compton 

2359-6356 

17 May 1998 

Compton 

9706-3911 

02 Apr 1998 

Crownsv ille 

7. Click on the chart background to deselect all of these accounts. 



8. From the Analysis menu, select List Items to display the List Items dialog 

again. Notice that the accounts you deselected on the chart are no longer 

selected in the dialog. 


How do I sort entities in the List Items dialog? 


In the List Items dialog you can sort the contents of columns in ascending or 

descending order, for example by amount, date, name, or representation. Sort the 

entities by their account type. 

To do this, click the Type column heading. All of the entities are sorted in 

alphabetical order of type. The three account types - Business Account, High 

Interest Account, and Savings Account - are grouped by type. 

Note: The semantic type that has been assigned to all entities is Bank 

Account. 


How do I remove columns from the List Items dialog? 

In the List Items dialog you can choose which columns to display or not to display. 

For example, a column may contain information that you are not interested in. All of 

the accounts on this chart have a theme line representation; you are not interested 

in this information. Remove the Representation column from the List Items dialog. 

To do this: 

1. Click Clear All to deselect any entities that may be selected. 

2. Click the Representation column heading and press the Delete key. 



The Representation column is removed from the List Items dialog. 


How do I add columns to the List Items dialog? 

You can also add columns to the List Items dialog to view additional information. 

Add columns to the dialog to show grading information. To do this: 


display the General page, if it is not already displayed: 


2. Turn on the following check boxes: 

— Grade 1 

— Grade 2 

— Grade 3 



The List Items dialog is displayed with columns for Grade 1, Grade 2, and Grade 3. 

Scroll to the right of the dialog to see these columns. 




How do I add columns containing attribute information? 

You can also add columns to the List Items dialog to view information about the 

attributes attached to chart items on the chart. The chart contains attributes that tell 

you where accounts are held and when they were opened. Add columns to the 

dialog to show attribute information. To do this: 

1. Click Columns to display the Columns dialog, and click the Attributes tab to 

display the Attributes page: 

2. Turn on the Account held at and Date Opened check boxes and click OK to 

return to the List Items dialog. 



The List Items dialog is displayed with columns for Account held at and Date 

Opened. Scroll to the right of the dialog to see these columns. 


Removing further columns 

There is no information displayed in the Date & Time, Date and Time columns. 

Remove these columns from the List Items dialog. To do this: 


display the General page: 



2. Turn off the Date & Time, Date and Time check boxes and click OK to return to 

the List Items dialog. 

The Date & Time, Date and Time columns are no longer displayed in the List 

Items dialog. 




Sorting Within a Table 7.3 

You can change the position in which columns are displayed in the List Items 

dialog. It may be more important to see columns, for example for the type, or label 

of an item at the beginning of the dialog. 

How do I sort within a table in the List Items dialog? 

It can be useful to sort the contents of columns in the List Items dialog to glean 

further information from the chart. Find the highest value of any one transaction by 

sorting links in the table by transaction value. To do this: 

1. Click the Links tab to display the Links page. 

2. Scroll to the right of the dialog and click the Label Value column heading to 

sort the transactions in ascending order. This displays the transactions from 

the lowest to the highest amount. 

Note: The table has been sorted in ascending order if the small arrow in the 

column header is pointing upwards . 


Sorting Within a Table 

3. Click the Label Value column heading once more to sort the transactions in 

descending order. This displays the transactions from the highest to the lowest 

amount. 

Note: A column has been sorted in descending order if the small arrow in the 

column heading is pointing downwards . 

4. Select the highest transaction amount (50000) which is displayed at the top of 

the table, and click OK to close the List Items dialog. 



5. Click the Fit Selection in Window toolbar button. The transaction that you 

selected in the List Items dialog is selected on the chart. 

4916-5428 

21 May 1998 

Stapleton 

8430-2253 

01 Mar 1996 

Compton 

1079-7367 

09 Oct 1995 

Crownsv ille 

4935-1288 

04 May 1989 

Mallory 

7855-5515 

01 Mar 1996 

Stapleton 

4553-1839 

03 Mar 1979 

Stapleton 

0457-1344 

15 Jun 1998 

Compton 

5594-8715 

10 Mar 1997 

Mallory 

2384-8847 

10 Sep 1998 

Stapleton 

4000 

500 

50000 

48000 


Sorting Within a Table 

How do I reposition columns in the List Items dialog? 

Rearrange the columns in the Links page of the List Items dialog so that the Date 

and Type columns are displayed as the first two columns. To do this: 

1. Press the F11 key to open the List Items dialog. 

2. Click the Links tab to display the Links page if it is not already displayed. 

3. Click Clear All to deselect currently selected items. 

4. Click on the Type column heading. While holding down the left mouse button, 

drag the column heading to the left until it is positioned as the first column in the 

List Items dialog. 

As you start to drag the column, the column heading changes to show that you 

are moving the Type column. 

Drag this column so that it is positioned at the left of the dialog. As you move 

the Type column to the left of the Label column, the split between the two 

columns becomes blue to indicate that the column will be placed here. 

5. Release the left mouse button. 

The Type column is placed at the left of the dialog. 

6. Resize the Type column so that all of the information is displayed within its 

width. To do this, double-click on the vertical split between the Type and the 

Label column headings. The mouse pointer changes as you double-click on 

the split and the column is resized so that all of the text fits within it. 



7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 and move the Date column so that it becomes the second 

column in the List Items dialog. 

8. Click the Date column heading to sort the links in order of date; then, while 

holding down the Ctrl key, click the Type column heading to secondarily sort 

the links in order of type. 



Analysis Attributes 

Analysis Attributes 7.4 

Analysis attributes are a category of attribute. They are never displayed on your 

chart and are only used for searching and other analysis. They are useful if you are 

searching a chart to find (for example) the day of the week that a happening 

occurred, or the number of links between accounts or individuals. 

How do I add columns for analysis attributes in List Items dialog? 

You are interested in any activity between accounts on your chart. To find this 

information you will use analysis attributes to find out the most active account and 

the total sum of money that has flowed to and from it. The most appropriate 

analysis attributes for this type of analysis are: Entity Links, Entity Links To, Entity 

Links From, and Entity Sum Links. Display columns for each of these in the List 

Items dialog. To do this: 

1. Click the Entities tab to return to the Entities page of the List Items dialog. 

2. Click Columns to open the Columns dialog, and click the Analysis Attributes 

tab to display the Analysis Attributes page: 

3. Turn on the following check boxes: 

— Entity Links 

— Entity Links From 

— Entity Links To 

— Entity Sum Links 

4. Click OK to return to the List Items dialog. 



The List Items dialog is displayed with columns for each of the above analysis 

attributes. You will have to scroll to the right of the dialog to see these columns. 


How do I find information using analysis attributes in List Items? 

When you have added columns for analysis attributes to the List Items dialog, sort 

each of them to perform further analysis on the accounts on your chart. You are 

interested in which account on the chart is the busiest, the sum total of all 

transactions of that account and the number of transactions flowing in and out of 

different accounts. To do this: 

1. Find out which account has the most transactions (connections) flowing to and 

from it. Click the Entity Links column heading to sort the entities in ascending 

order of number of connections. The account with the greatest number of 

connections will be at the bottom of the list. Business Account 4916-5428 has 

five connections. This is the busiest account on the chart as it has the most 

connections. 

2. Find all of the accounts with more than one transaction (connection) from them. 

Click the Entity Links From column heading. There are four accounts with 

more than one connection from them to other accounts. Business Account 

4935-1288 and High Interest Account 4546-4646 have two connections from 

them each, Savings Account 1079-7367 has three connections from it, and 

Business Account 4916-5428 has four connections from it. 


Analysis Attributes 

3. Find the account with the largest number of transactions (connections) flowing 

to it. Click the Entity Links To column heading. Business Account 3785-5515 

has three connections to it from other accounts on the chart. 

4. Click the Entity Sum Links column heading to find out which of the accounts 

has had the most money flowing in and out of it. A total of 98790 has flowed to 

and from Business Account 4916-5428. 

5. Select this account and click OK to close the List Items dialog. 

6. Click the Fit Selection in Window toolbar button. The Business Account 

4916-5428 is selected: 

Further uses of analysis attributes 

You are interested in the day of the week on which the transactions occurred. You 

believe that Wednesday is the day on which the largest volume of transactions take 

place. In this example, the day of the week name on which a transaction occurred 

is part of the date and time on the link itself. To view the day of the week name you 

will have to display the Links page of the List Items dialog. To do this: 

1. Press the F11 key to open the List Items dialog, and click the Links tab to 

display the Links page. 


4916-5428 

21 May 1998 

Stapleton


2. Click Columns to display the Columns dialog, and click the Analysis 

Attributes tab to display the Analysis Attributes page: 

3. Turn on the Day of Week Name check box and click OK to return to the List 

Items dialog. 

All of the transactions are displayed with the day of the week name on which 

they occurred. You will have to scroll to the right of the dialog to see these 

columns: 

4. You are interested in all of the transactions that took place on a Wednesday. 

Click the Day of Week Name column heading to sort the transactions in 

alphabetical order of the day of week name. There are six transactions 

occurring on a Wednesday. 



Copying Information from the List Items Dialog 

Copying Information from the List Items Dialog 7.5 

You can copy information from the List Items dialog into another Windows 

application such as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. The contents are formatted so 

that Excel can interpret them according to their type, for example date & time, 

number, text, flag. The column headings in the spreadsheet will be the same as 

those in the List Items dialog. 

How do I copy from the List Items dialog into another application? 

You want to find the total of all of the transactions that took place on a Wednesday. 

An easy way of doing this is to copy the items into Microsoft Excel and sum all of 

the values. To do this: 

1. Select the six transactions that took place on a Wednesday in the List Items 

dialog and click Copy. 

2. Click OK to close the List Items dialog. 


3. Start Microsoft Excel with a new empty spreadsheet. 

4. Press Ctrl+V to paste the six items into the spreadsheet. 


The column headings in the spreadsheet are the same as the column headings 

in the List Items dialog. 

5. You want to know the sum of all of the values that you pasted into the 

spreadsheet. In the Label column, hold down the left mouse button and click 

on the first value while holding down the left mouse button drag to select all of 

the remaining values in this column. Release the left mouse button. The sum of 

the values (86300) is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the 

spreadsheet. 

sum of all values 

(86300) 

6. Close Microsoft Excel, do not save any changes to the spreadsheet. 


Sorting Theme Lines Within a Chart 

Sorting Theme Lines Within a Chart 7.6 

There are a number of different chart layouts available in Analyst’s Notebook, one 

of which is the Theme Line layout. A Theme Line layout is useful when you have a 

large number of theme lines on your chart. 

It allows you to: 

• sort the theme lines by an attribute, for example ordering the theme lines down 

the chart in descending order of the number of links 

• separate theme lines vertically by a specified distance 

• align theme line icons 

• arrange diverting event frames 

A Theme Line layout is not appropriate for charts that do not contain theme lines. 

How do I perform a Theme Line layout? 

Before you perform a Theme Line layout, display the Layouts toolbar. To do this: 

1. Click on the chart background to make sure that no items are selected. 

2. Click the Layout Setup toolbar button to display the Setup Layouts dialog and 

select Theme Line to display the Theme Line page: 



3. When the theme lines are displayed on the chart, you want them to be evenly 

spaced. In the Distance box, type 1 (if your Windows settings are in inches) or 

2.5 (if your Windows settings are in centimeters). 

4. You want the theme lines to be arranged in descending order. To do this, in the 

Order area, select By Attribute and from the drop-down list select Entity 

Links. 

5. Turn on the Descending Order check box. When you run the Theme Line 

layout the transactions will be displayed in descending order. 

6. Click OK to close the Setup Layouts dialog. 

7. Click the Theme Line Chart Layout toolbar button. Your chart is laid out 

according to the settings you specified in the Setup Layouts dialog. 


Sorting Theme Lines Within a Chart 

8. Click the Fit Chart in Window toolbar button to see the entire chart (Example 

7 finished.anb). 

4916-5428 

21 May 1998 

Stapleton 

3785-5515 

25 Mar 1994 

Crownsv ille 

1079-7367 

09 Oct 1995 

Crownsv ille 

4546-4646 

03 Dec 1996 

Crownsv ille 

4935-1288 

04 May 1989 

Mallory 

7855-5515 

01 Mar 1996 

Stapleton 

8430-2253 

01 Mar 1996 

Compton 

4989-7999 

14 Sep 1998 

Crownsv ille 

8553-3667 

04 Jul 1996 

Stapleton 

3217-1997 

19 Dec 1996 

Compton 

2359-6356 

17 May 1998 

Compton 

9706-3911 

02 Apr 1998 

Crownsv ille 

6729-3452 

21 Aug 1998 

Compton 

0034-3498 

01 Jan 1997 

Stapleton 

8831-5529 

10 Mar 1997 

Crownsv ille 

5610-0962 

03 Dec 1996 

Stapleton 

1217-2366 

13 Mar 1997 

Mallory 

4553-1839 

03 Mar 1979 

Stapleton 

0457-1344 

15 Jun 1998 

Compton 

5594-8715 

10 Mar 1997 

Mallory 

2384-8847 

10 Sep 1998 

Stapleton 

4945-1221 

03 Dec 1996 

Mallory 

3995-6194 

10 Mar 1997 

Mallory 

9. Save and close your chart. 


4000 

500 

50000 

48000 

45000 

40000 

15000 

17500 

12600 

13500 

12000 

1280 

170 

1,630 

590 

500 

460 

1000 

300 

540 

200 

540 

90


Summary 7.7 


• analyze your chart using List Items 

• add and remove columns in the List Items dialog 

• use analysis attributes to analyze your chart 

• sort columns in the List Items dialog 

• copy information from the List Items dialog into another Windows application 

• perform a Theme Line layout 


Summary 


Merging Charts 

8 

This example explains how you can copy items from one chart into another, and 

how Analyst’s Notebook automatically merges them. It also describes how you can 

manually merge items. 

Contents 


Working with Label Merge and Paste Rules 211 

Working with Attribute Merge and Paste Rules 215 

Manually Merging Chart Items 220 

Merging Links 227 

Finding Matching Entities 236 

Combining Attributes 244 

Summary 247 


Introduction 



Scenario 


• merge and paste rules for labels and attributes 

• connection styles when merging 

• finding matching entities on a chart 

• combining two attribute classes into one 



page 17. 






A chart containing information as part of an ongoing investigation into the 

happenings surrounding three suspects, FARMER, TOTTIER, and GOLDBURG, 

has already been created for you. Surveillance has been carried out and further 

information is now available in three separate charts. 

Two of these charts are from an earlier investigation by your department 

concerning some of the suspects and bank accounts on your chart. 

In addition, you have access to another chart from an independent financial 

institution, also concerning the accounts involved in the investigation. 

You want to add this additional information to the chart that you are working on in 

your current investigation so that you have a combined chart containing the 

information from all of the investigations. 


Chapter 8: Merging Charts 

Working with Label Merge and Paste Rules 8.2 

When you are pasting entities from another chart, Analyst’s Notebook treats two 

entities as the same if their identities match, and automatically merges them. 

Analyst’s Notebook also allows you to manually merge chart items. Whenever 

items are merged you must decide how you want Analyst’s Notebook to handle 

their labels. You can choose to: 

• Merge 

• Append 

• Discard 

Merge Merging entities with identical labels on a chart results in a single label. For 

example, merging John HUDSON and John HUDSON results in a label John 

HUDSON. 

John HUDSON 

Merge 

John HUDSON 

Append Concatenate one label to the other. For example, if the labels of John HUDSON 

and John HUDSON are appended the resulting label will be John HUDSON John 

HUDSON, separated by a new line. 

John HUDSON 

John HUDSON 

Append 

John HUDSON 

John HUDSON 

John HUDSON 


Working with Label Merge and Paste Rules 

Discard Ignore the label of the chart item you are pasting (paste operation) or the chart 

items you selected last (merge operation) and retain the label of the original or first 

selected chart item. 

John HUDSON 

HUDSON 

First Selected Second Selected 

Discard 

John HUDSON 

If you set a label merge and paste rule in a chart, it will be applied to all 

subsequent merging and pasting of labels until you change it. 

Note: Numeric links have different merge and paste behavior to labels. For further 

information on the merge and paste behavior of numeric links, refer to Sum 

Numeric Links on page 227. For more information on merge rules, refer to the 

Online Help. 


How do I set label merge and paste rules? 

210 Green Street 

Little Rock 


St Saviour 

Address 

Address 


Your department is part way through an investigation into three suspects 

GOLDBURG, TOTTIER and FARMER. During an earlier investigation, a chart 

containing further information relating to GOLDBURG and a Janet TOTTIER was 

created. You now want to copy information from this earlier chart into the chart you 

have created as part of the current investigation. To do this: 

Address 

Money 

1. Open Example 8 initial.anb. To access the folder in which this chart is 


Documents\i 2\i 2 Analyst’s Notebook 7 folder, and double-click on 

the User Guide - Customizing and Analyzing folder. This will open 

the chart that you are working on in the current investigation: 

GOLDBURG 

Handgun 

David GREEN 

Janet TOTTIER 

YES 

Associates 

Drugs 

Anonymous 2 FARMER 

Money 

Drugs 

Anonymous 1 

Account Holder 

Account Holder 12000 

0942-5473 

A ccount Ty pe = C hecking 


9743-2374 




save your charts in. Type Example 8 merging.anb in the File Name box 


19000 

4509-6822 

UK 


17500 

4598-0900 

US 


20000 

15000 

1002-1002 

UK 



Working with Label Merge and Paste Rules 


dialog, and select Options\Behavior to display the Behavior page: 

4. In the Label Merge And Paste Rules area, select Discard. When you paste 

items with the same identity into this chart, or manually merge items, they will 

automatically merge and only one label will be displayed for each item. 




Working with Attribute Merge and Paste Rules 8.3 

When you are merging or pasting chart items with attributes, you can decide how 

you want Analyst’s Notebook to combine their values. 

For example, you could choose to display an attribute of type Text so that all of the 

values are combined and displayed on a separate line using the “combine with line 

break” option when merging or pasting. 

In the example below, DUPLEASE and Kevin DUPLEASE both have instances of 

the Armed attribute class showing the weapons that they are known to have in their 

possession. When the “combine with line break” option is specified and the two 

entities are merged, both of the attribute instances are combined, each value being 

displayed on a separate line. 


Shotgun 

combine with line break 


DUPLEASE 


Shotgun 

Handgun 

US 

DUPLEASE 


Handgun 

US 

You can apply different rules to each of the different attribute types (Text, Date & 

Time, Number, and Flag); each of these rules is described in further detail in the 

online help. 

An attribute merge and paste rule applies to just the attribute class for which it is 

set. It will be applied to all subsequent merging and pasting of that attribute class 

until you change it. 


Working with Attribute Merge and Paste Rules 

How do I set attribute merge and paste rules? 

GOLDBURG has two aliases, John PALMER and David GREEN. Your current 

chart contains the alias he has used during this investigation, David GREEN, as an 

instance of the Alias attribute class. During an earlier investigation a chart was 

created that contains another alias that he has used, John PALMER, also as an 

instance of the Alias attribute class. You want to copy the items from this earlier 

chart into your current chart. When you paste these items into the chart, you want 

each of the combined values to be displayed on a separate line. To do this: 

1. Select Definitions\Attribute Classes to display the Attribute Classes page of 

the Chart Properties dialog: 



2. Select the Alias attribute class and click Properties. This will display the Edit 

Attribute Class dialog: 

3. In the Behavior area, from the On Paste drop-down list, select combine with 

line break. When you paste the GOLDBURG entity from the earlier chart into 

this chart each alias will be displayed on a separate line. 

4. Click OK to close the Edit Attribute Class dialog. 



Working with Attribute Merge and Paste Rules 

How do I copy and paste attributes and labels? 

When you have set the merge and paste rules of a chart you can then copy items 

into it from another chart. A chart has already been created for you that contains 

information about the relationship between GOLDBURG and TOTTIER. Each of 

them are displayed with attributes: GOLDBURG has values for the Date of Birth 

and Alias attribute classes and TOTTIER has an attribute to show that she is 

known to be violent. Copy the contents of this chart into your current chart and 

observe what happens when some of the items and attributes are automatically 

merged and some of them are not. To do this: 

1. Open the chart Example 8 merge 1.anb. 

GOLDBURG 

John PA LMER 

16 Jan 1954 

Associates 

TOTTIER 

YES 

2. From the Edit menu, select Copy Chart. 

Note: The Copy Chart command will not be available if you have selected any 

chart items. Click on the chart background to deselect any items that 

may be selected. 

3. Close the chart Example 8 merge 1.anb. 

4. In the Example 8 merging chart press Ctrl+V. The contents of the chart 

Example 8 merge 1.anb are pasted into it. 



The two GOLDBURG entities merge automatically. This is because their identities 

are the same. The merged entity is displayed with an attribute instance of the Alias 

attribute class, displayed on two separate lines. 

GOLDBURG 

Handgun 

David GREEN 

John PA LMER 

16 Jan 1954 



Manually Merging Chart Items 

Manually Merging Chart Items 8.4 

When you have chart items that do not have the same identity they will not merge 

automatically as a result of a paste operation. You can merge these chart items 

manually. 

When you merge two chart items, all of the information attached to the individual 

items, such as cards and descriptions, will be copied into the merged item. If the 

item from which the merge is being performed contains information that is not the 

same as the item that it is being merged into, for example their descriptions are 

different, then it is added to the merged item as a card. If the information on each 

item before they are merged is the same, then a card will not be added to the 

merged item. 

Label merge and paste rules and attribute merge and paste behavior also apply 

when merging chart items manually. For more information on label merge and 

paste rules, refer to Working with Label Merge and Paste Rules on page 211. 

How can I check if entities are similar? 

You now have two similar entities on your chart: one for TOTTIER and one for 

Janet TOTTIER. They appear to be the same person but they have not merged. 

This is because their identities are different. Examine each of them in turn to see if 

they have any common characteristics. If you decide that they are the same 

person, merge them manually so that you have just one TOTTIER entity on your 

chart. To do this: 

1. Drag the TOTTIER entity up the chart so that it is easier to see and double-click 

on it to open the Edit Icon dialog. 



2. Select Data\Description & Grades to display the Description & Grades page: 

The description on this entity is “Has a number of convictions for weapon 

possession and violence. Believed to live at 12 High Street, St Saviour with 

FARMER, a known drug dealer.” 



3. Select Cards\Card List to display the Card List page. This entity has two 

cards. These cards describe details of previous convictions for weapon 

possession and violence. 

4. Click Cancel to close the Edit Icon dialog. 

5. Now examine Janet TOTTIER in the same way: double-click on it to open the 

Edit Icon dialog and look at the description. The description on this entity is 

“Has previous convictions for possession of a knife and violence.” This is very 

similar to the description on TOTTIER. 

6. Look at the cards on Janet TOTTIER. There are two cards associated with this 

entity containing dated cards with observations from the current investigation. 



How do I manually merge entities? 


The descriptions on the TOTTIER and Janet TOTTIER entities are similar. You 

believe that they are both the same person as they both have similar previous 

convictions. Manually merge the Janet TOTTIER entity into the TOTTIER entity. To 

do this: 

1. Select TOTTIER and Janet TOTTIER, in that order. 

Note: The order in which the entities are selected is important. The second 

selected entity (in this case Janet TOTTIER) is merged into the first 

selected entity (in this case TOTTIER). 

2. From the Tools menu, select Merge Entities. 

The Janet TOTTIER entity is merged into the TOTTIER entity. 



What happens to cards on a merged entity? 

When you merged the TOTTIER and Janet TOTTIER entities the cards on each of 

them also merged. Before the merge there were two cards on TOTTIER and two 

cards on Janet TOTTIER. Examine the merged TOTTIER entity to see what 

happened to these cards. To do this: 

1. Double-click on TOTTIER to open the Edit Icon dialog, and select Cards\Card 

List to open the Card List page: 

There are now five cards on the TOTTIER entity. These five cards are made up 

of: 

— two from the original TOTTIER entity, relating to previous convictions 

— two from Janet TOTTIER, relating to dated observations from the current 

investigation 

— one containing information in the original Janet TOTTIER entity 

(description, grades, source type, source reference, and so on). 


2. Select Card 5: Janet TOTTIER to display this card: 


Some of the information on Janet TOTTIER (the description and grades) was 

different to that on TOTTIER so it has been added as a card. 




4. Move TOTTIER so that she is placed directly below GOLDBURG on the chart. 

Notice that when you pasted the items from the chart Example 8 merge 

1.anb into this chart an additional link between GOLDBURG and TOTTIER 

was pasted into it showing that they are associates. 

GOLDBURG 

Handgun 

David GREEN 

John PA LMER 

16 Jan 1954 

Associates 

TOTTIER 

YES 




Merging Links 8.5 

Sum Numeric 

Links 

You can automatically merge links when you paste them into a chart. The resulting 

link will depend on the connection style of the link. 

The connection style of a link can be, in ascending order: 

• Single 

• Directed 

• Multiple 

For further information on connection styles, refer to the online help. 

When links are merged the resulting connection style is the highest one in the 

order. For example: 

• if a link with a single connection style is merged into another link with a single 

connection style, the resulting link will be a Single connection 

• if a link with a single connection style is merged into another link with a directed 

connection style, the resulting link will be a Directed connection 

• if a link with a directed connection style is merged into another link with a 

multiple connection style, the resulting link will be a Multiple connection 

If the labels on your links are numeric, you can choose to add the numbers 

together when pasting or merging using the Sum Numeric Links option. 

200 

4526-5765 1456-9875 

Sum Numeric Links 

1200 

4526-5765 1456-9875 

1000 

4526-5765 1456-9875 


Merging Links 

Single 

connection 

Directed 

connection 

The example below demonstrates what happens when a single link is merged with 

another link having a Single connection style. The resulting link has an arrowhead 

at both ends. This makes it difficult to see the transaction amounts flowing in each 

direction: 

10000 

1546-4846 5479-8754 

The example below demonstrates what happens if a Directed link is merged with 

another link that has a Directed connection style. The resulting link is a Directed 

link that clearly shows the transaction amounts flowing in each direction: 

5000 

10000 

30000 

1546-4846 5479-8754 

Resulting Link 

30000 

1546-4846 5479-8754 

Resulting Link 

7000 

15000 

37000 

1546-4846 5479-8754 


20000 

1546-4846 5479-8754 

2000 

5000 

7000 

1546-4846 5479-8754

How do I find the connection style of a set of links? 


Before you paste the contents of another chart into your current chart you need to 

find the connection style of the links. To do this: 

1. Right-click on the link between 0942-5473 and 4509-6822, and from the 

shortcut menu, select Edit Item Properties to display the Edit Link dialog. 

2. Select Style\Connection to display the Connection page: 

3. The connection style on this link is set to be Single. 

A single connection style is not appropriate in this example as you have 

transactions where amounts flow in both directions. When you merge links from 

another chart into this chart, the transactions will be displayed as a single link 

with a double-headed arrowhead. This will make it difficult to determine the 

transaction amounts flowing in each direction. 

4. Click Cancel to close the Edit Link dialog. 


Merging Links 

How do I change the connection style of a link? 

At least one of the Transaction links on your chart has a Single connection style. 

You know that this is not the appropriate connection style for the type of 

information that you want to paste into this chart as you want to be able to see the 

flow of the transactions between the accounts. Find all of the Transaction links on 

the chart and change their connection style to be Directed. To do this: 

1. Press the F11 key to open the List Items dialog. 

2. If it is not already displayed, click the Links tab to display the Links page: 

3. Click the Type column heading. This groups entries of the same type. 

4. Select all of the Transaction links (5 of them) and click OK to close the List 

Items dialog and select the links on the chart. 

5. All of the Transaction links are selected on the chart. Right-click on one of 

them, and from the shortcut menu, select Combined Properties to display the 

Edit Chart Items dialog. 


6. Select Style\Connection to display the Connection page: 

7. In the Multiplicity area, select Directed. 

8. Click OK to close the Edit Link dialog. 


All of the Transaction links will have a Directed connection style. When you paste 

links with direction into this chart they will be drawn with the correct arrowhead 

style. You will not get an arrowhead at both ends of the link. 


Merging Links 

How do I sum numeric links automatically when merging? 

When you paste Transaction links from another chart into this chart you want the 

total of the transactions in each direction to be summed. To do this: 


dialog, and select Options\Behavior to display the Behavior page: 

2. Make sure that the Sum Numeric Links check box is turned on and click OK 

to close the Chart Properties dialog. 


3. Open the chart Example 8 merge 2.anb: 

0942-5473 


8500 

2500 


5. Close Example 8 merge 2.anb. 

2309-3463 


14000 

4509-6822 


16500 

6789-0911 


6. Paste the copied chart into your initial chart. 

7. Look at the Transaction links between the accounts. 


21000 

The Transaction links between 0942-5473 and 4509-6822 have been updated: 

— A transaction for 2500 from 4509-6822 to 0942-5473 has been added. 

— The transaction amount from 0942-5473 to 4509-6822 has increased to 

20500. This is because the Sum Numeric Links check box was turned on 

in Step 2 and you pasted a transaction for 8500 into this chart. 

The transactions between 4509-6822 and 1002-1002 have also been updated: 

— A transaction for 5000 from 1002-1002 to 4509-6822 has been added. 

5000 

1002-1002 



Merging Links 

If you had not set the connection style on these links to be Directed you would 

have had a single link with an arrowhead at both ends with the sum of the 

transactions. You would not have known how much had flowed in each 

direction. 

0942-5473 


20500 

2500 

4509-6822 

UK 


8. Two new accounts have been added to this chart: 2309-3463 and 6789-0911. 

These accounts have crossed links and make the chart untidy. Rearrange them 

to tidy up the chart. 


15000 

5000 

1002-1002 

UK 

A ccount Ty pe = C hecking


Little Rock 


St Saviour 

Anonymous 2 

Address 

Address 

Address 

Money 

Drugs 


GOLDBURG 

Handgun 

David GREEN 

John PA LMER 

16 Jan 1954 

Associates 

TOTTIER 

YES 

Associates 

FARMER 

Money 

Drugs 

Anonymous 1 



0942-5473 

Account Type = C hecking 


20500 

2500 


9743-2374 


UK 

19000 

4509-6822 

17500 

14000 


US 

4598-0900 



20000 

21000 

2309-3463 


15000 

16500 


5000 

UK 

1002-1002 

A ccount Type = C hecking 

6789-0911 


Finding Matching Entities 

Finding Matching Entities 8.6 

Analyst’s Notebook includes a powerful tool called Find Matching Entities which 

identifies similar entities on a chart. This tool can be used to overcome some of the 

problems associated with poor data quality and the inconsistencies experienced 

when incorporating data from disparate data sources. This can include: 

• different recordings of the same information 

• duplicated entities as a result of adding information from different data sources 

• data input errors, misspellings, or variations of spellings in the entity label, for 

example there may be a Paul Mantor and Paul MANTOR on the chart 

• duplication of information has occurred on a chart, but the formatting of the 

information is different, for example telephone number formats 878 965 4782 

and 878-965-4782 

These inconsistencies mean that the same piece of information can be 

represented by different entities on a chart. This could mean that key associations 

are overlooked and vital leads can go unnoticed. 

You may find that entities from different charts contain the same information 

presented in slightly different formats. Your organization may represent telephone 

numbers as three groups of digits, separated with a space, for example: 

452 548 7849. Another organization may represent telephone numbers as a string 

of ten numbers without a hyphen and with a prefix, for example 

Domestic Number: 4525487849. As the digits in both of them are the same you 

could find all of the entities with identities containing these digits and merge them 

into a single entity on your chart. 



In the example below, the contents of a telephone chart have been copied into 

another telephone chart containing information about the same telephone 

numbers. The Telephone entities on the chart have not merged automatically as 

their identities do not match. However, you can see that the telephone numbers are 

the same. You can search the chart for all Telephone entities with matching digits 

in their identity using the Find Matching Entities tool and merge them. 

Domestic number: 4781546788 Domestic number: 9572441327 Business number: 2773139037 Domestic number: 2808012997 Business number: 01849971489 


Subscriber Subscriber Subscriber 

Subscriber Subscriber 

277 313 9037 

9572441327 


280801 2997 Diamond Trading 478 154 6788 

Merging the matching entities will produce a chart similar to that below, where 

there is only one occurrence of each telephone number on the chart: 

Discount Warehouse Domestic number: 9572441327 

John GREEN 

01849 971 489 



Business number: 2773139037 Kevin DUPLEASE 

John GREEN 

Domestic number: 2808012997 

Herbie PARKER 

Business number: 01849971489 

Diamond Trading 

Herbie PARKER 

Subscriber 

Domestic number:4781546788 

Any additional information contained on the item from which the merge is 

performed is added to the merged item as a card. 



Pasting more information into a chart 

45980900 

A ccount Ty pe = Sav ings 

Account Banker 

You have received information from a financial institution about some of the 

accounts on your chart. Paste this chart into your current chart. To do this: 

1. Open the chart Example 8 merge 3.anb: 

Second Direct 

09425473 

A ccount Ty pe = Business 

US 


Second Interstate Bank 

Tagura Credit Union 


10021002 

A ccount Ty pe = High Interest 

UK 


3. Close the chart Example 8 merge 3.anb. 

4. Paste the copied chart into your initial chart. 


Binkleys International 


97432374 


US


Little Rock 


St Saviour 

Anonymous 2 

5. Tidy up your chart so that it looks similar to that below: 

Address 

Address 

Address 

Money 

Drugs 

GOLDBURG 

Handgun 

David GREEN 

John PA LMER 

16 Jan 1954 

Associates 

TOTTIER 

YES 

Associates 

FARMER 

Money 

Drugs 

Anonymous 1 



0942-5473 

Account Type = Checking 


10021002 

A ccount Type = High Interest 

UK 

97432374 


US 

20500 

2500 





9743-2374 


19000 

17500 


UK 

4509-6822 

14000 

Account Type = C hecking 

US 

4598-0900 


45980900 Second Direct 

A ccount Ty pe = Sav ings 

09425473 

A ccount Ty pe = Business 

US 


20000 

21000 

2309-3463 





15000 

16500 


5000 

UK 

1002-1002 


6789-0911 

Account Type = C hecking


How do I find matching entities using Smart Matching? 

side bar 

When you pasted the contents of Example 8 merge 3.anb into your initial 

chart, the accounts did not merge automatically. This is because the account 

numbers are in a different format, for example 0942-5473 and 09425473. However, 

these two accounts the same "real world" account, as the digits are identical, just 

in slightly different formats. 

Smart Matching uses a set of predefined rules for deciding whether one entity 

could be the same real-world object as another. It does this by examining entities 

and their links, and comparing their entity types and their property values to 

produce an overall score of between 1 and 10. The score is an indication of the 

probability of the two entities being the same real-world object. 

The score ranges from one, which indicates the weakest match, to 10, which 

indicates a perfect match. The threshold can be used to produce fewer but 

stronger matches, or more but weaker matches. 

Find all of the accounts that contain the same account number and merge them. 

To do this: 

1. From the Analysis menu, select Find Matching Entities to display the Find 

Matching Entities dialog. 

The Find Matching Entities dialog is typically docked to the main application 

window: 



2. Double-click on the side bar of the Find Matching Entities dialog so that it floats 

freely within the application window: 

3. From the drop-down list, select Smart Matching if it is not already selected, 

then click Setup. This displays the Setup Smart Matching dialog: 

4. In the Matching area, make sure that the Threshold slider is set to 9, as you 

want to look for the strongest possible matches. 

5. As you want to search all of the entities on your chart for the strongest match, 

in the Search Area, from the Entities drop-down list, select All if it is not 

already selected. 



6. Click OK to close the Setup Smart Matching dialog. 

7. Click Find to run the search. The matching entities are displayed: 

The Matched Sets area shows that four pairs of matched entities have been 

found. Notice that even though the identities of each of the entities are different 

they both contain the same digits but in slightly different formats: account 

number 0942-5473 (Account Type = Checking) contains the same digits as 

account number 09425473 (Account Type = Business). Each matched pair has 

been scored as 9, which means that it is very likely that these entities are the 

same real world object, and can be merged into a single entity. 

8. In the Matched Sets area, click the Select All button. This selects all of the 

matched entities in the Matched Sets area. 

9. To merge each pair of matched entities into one entity, in the Matched Sets 

area, click Merge. 

10. Close the Find Matching Entities dialog. 

11. To see all of the chart on your screen, from the View menu, click Fit Chart In 

Window. 

12. You can now see that each pair of matched entities has been merged into 

single entities. Tidy up your chart by removing any crossed links or items that 

are obscuring other items on the chart. 



Little Rock 


St Saviour 

Address 

Address 

Address 

Money 

Drugs 


GOLDBURG 

Handgun 

David GREEN 

John PA LMER 

16 Jan 1954 

Associates 

TOTTIER 

YES 

Associates 


Money 

Drugs 

Anonymous 1 


US 

US 




0942-5473 

A ccount Ty pe = C hecking Business 


20500 

2500 


19000 

4509-6822 

UK 

17500 


14000 


A ccount Ty pe = C hecking Sav ings 


US 

US 

US 


9743-2374 

A ccount Ty pe = C hecking High Interest 

4598-0900 

Second Direct 

20000 

21000 

2309-3463 


15000 

5000 

16500 


6789-0911 






UK 

UK 

1002-1002

Combining Attributes 

Combining Attributes 8.7 

Organizations may define different attribute classes to convey the same 

information. If you paste information that you have received from another 

organization into a chart created by your organization you may find that there are 

two attribute classes defined in the resulting chart. Each of these attribute classes 

may convey exactly the same information. You may also find that some of the items 

on the resulting chart have instances of both attribute classes defined, hence 

duplicating the information on the chart. You can combine the two attribute classes 

so that you have only one attribute class to convey the same information. 

In the example below, the attribute class Country is defined in Chart 1 to show that 

GREEN and DUPLEASE both deal in the UK. Chart 2 has a Territory attribute 

class defined that conveys the same information as the Country attribute class in 

Chart 1. When the contents of Chart 2 are pasted into Chart 1 the resulting chart 

will contain both the Country and Territory attribute classes. When you combine the 

two attribute classes, the Territory attribute class is pasted into values of the 

Country attribute class. 

Chart 1 

Chart 2 

Chart 2 pasted 

into Chart 1 

Resulting chart 

after combining 

Country and Territory 

attribute classes 

GREEN 

UK 

GREEN 

UK 

GREEN 

UK 


DUPLEASE 

UK 

DUPLEASE 

Handgun 

UK 

DUPLEASE 

Handgun 

UK 

UK 

DUPLEASE 

Handgun 

UK 

Country attribute class 

Territory attribute class


How do I combine values from two different attribute classes? 

Some of the items on the chart Example 3 merge 3.anb have instances of the 

Territory attribute class. The Territory attribute class was added to the current chart 

when you pasted the content of Example 3 merge 3.anb into it. The Territory 

attribute class conveys exactly the same information as the Country attribute class 

that is currently defined in your chart. Some of the items on the chart have entries 

for both attribute classes. You only want to use the Country attribute class to 

convey this information. Merge the contents of the Territory attribute class into the 

Country attribute class so that a single Country attribute class is created. To do 

this: 

1. From the Tools menu, select Combine Attributes to display the Combine 

Attributes dialog: 

2. When you combine the values of the Territory and Country attribute classes 

you want to remove the Territory attribute class from your chart. From the Paste 

Values of Attribute drop-down list, select Territory, and turn on the Delete 

Attribute Class check box. 

3. From the Onto Values of Attribute drop-down list, select Country. 

4. From the Paste Behavior drop-down list select combine. Make sure that the 

Discard Duplicates check box is turned on. 

5. Click OK to combine the attributes on the chart. 


Combining Attributes 


Little Rock 


St Saviour 

Address 

Address 

Address 

Money 

Drugs 


Each of the entities that had an instance of the Territory attribute class are 

displayed with an instance of the Country attribute class. The Territory attribute 

class no longer exists. Your chart should now look similar to that below (Example 

8 finished.anb): 

GOLDBURG 

Handgun 

David GREEN 

John PA LMER 

16 Jan 1954 

Associates 

TOTTIER 

YES 

Associates 

Money 

Drugs 

Anonymous 1 





20500 

0942-5473 2500 

US 

A ccount Ty pe = C hecking Business 






20000 


9743-2374 

1002-1002 Tagura Credit Union 

US 

UK 



19000 

17500 


14000 

4509-6822 

UK 


4598-0900 

US 

A ccount Ty pe = C hecking Sav ings 

Second Direct 

21000 

2309-3463 


15000 

5000 

16500 

6789-0911 



Summary 8.8 


• use merge and paste rules for labels and attributes 

• change connection styles when merging 

• find matching entities on a chart 

• combine two attribute classes into one 


Summary 


Basic Searching 

9 

This example explains how you can search for items on a chart using basic search 

tools. 

Contents 


Using the Search Bar to Find Chart Items 252 

Using Visual Search to Find a Chart Item 256 

Finding a Path Between Two Entities on a Chart 259 


Laying out a Chart 269 

Summary 273 


Introduction 




• finding items based on the text they contain 

• marking a selection with a selection set 

• performing a simple search 

• finding a path between two entities on a chart 

• finding chart items that are linked to a selection 

• showing and hiding information 

• rearranging items on your chart using layouts 



page 17. 







Scenario 

Chapter 9: Basic Searching 

Two people are known and under investigation. In each case you know only their 

last name; you do not know their first name. One of these suspects, DUKE, 

appears only once on the chart but there are two entities for the second suspect 

SMITHSON. From intelligence you know that SMITHSON is a male who lives in 

Whitford so you have some further information with which to find him. 

Find DUKE and SMITHSON on the chart. Then find any other individual on the 

chart with whom they are associated. When you have found this individual, find any 

further individuals with whom they may be associated. 

Examine the associations in further detail by hiding all of the chart items that are 

not associated with the three suspects to see if you glean further information from 

the associations. 

An alternative approach to finding areas of interest is to lay out your chart in 

different ways. When you have found how the suspects may be related on the 

chart, use the layout tools to see if rearranging the items on your chart confirms 

your findings. 


Using the Search Bar to Find Chart Items 

Using the Search Bar to Find Chart Items 9.2 

Search Bar box 

The Search Bar allows you to search through all of the information in your chart in 

one simple operation. You can find chart items containing specific text using the 

Search Bar. Enter in the word, phrase, number, or date you are looking for and the 

Search Bar returns a list of all the items in the chart that match your request. 

The Search Bar contains a close-up preview of each resulting item so that you can 

always locate your results, no matter how large your chart. 

The search results table lists 

of all items in the chart that 

match the search request in 

item rank order. 


A close-up preview 

window of each selected 

item.


The Search Bar looks for the search text in all items on the chart including: 

• Entities 

• Links 

• Cards 

• Attributes 

• Identities 

• Semantic Types 

• Data records 

How do I find text on a chart? 

DUKE 

Compton 

A chart has been created for you that contains information about meetings and 

people. You need to find a known suspect, DUKE, but you do not know where he is 

on the chart. Use Find Text to find the DUKE entity on the chart. To do this: 





Anonymous 

Meeting WARD 

C hilv ille 

Meeting 

SMITHSON 

Whitford 

DOWN 

Meeting 

Meeting 

SMITH 

Meeting 

CASTE 

Bedworth 

GAMBLES Meeting 

JONES 

PRESCOTT Meeting 

Boltby 

TAYLOR 

Hockley 

Meeting 

DUPLEASE 

SMITHSON Meeting 

Staines 

BOSTON 

Knightly 

DAVIS 

Brisley 

MELDREW 

Tamford 

Meeting 

BRIGHTMAN 

Wakeley 

Meeting JAMES 

Tamford 

Meeting 

FISK 

Boltby 

Meeting Anonymous 

Anonymous 

Meeting 

BISHOP 

Lake Worth 

JOHNSON 


Using the Search Bar to Find Chart Items 



save your charts in. Type Example 9 basic searching.anb in the File 


3. Search for any text on the chart that contains DUKE. In the Search Bar type 

DUKE: 

4. Click the Find All Matches button. 

The results of the search are shown in the results table, and the preview 

window displays a close up of the selected matched chart entity: 

5. Make sure that DUKE is selected in the Search Bar results list, then click the 

Fit Chart in Window toolbar button, so that the whole of the chart is visible, 

and you can see the position of DUKE. 

6. So that it is easier to see the position of DUKE on your chart, click the 

Highlight toolbar button. DUKE is now clearly highlighted on your chart. 

How do I create a selection set? 

Create a selection set and add DUKE to it so that it is easier for you to find him on 

the chart in later parts of this example. To create a selection set: 

1. Display the Selection Sets toolbar, if it is not already displayed; right-click in the 

toolbar area, and select Selection Sets. 

2. From the Choose Set drop-down list select 1, and click the Define Set toolbar 

button. 



3. DUKE is displayed in the Search Bar preview window with an attribute to show 

that he is a member of selection set 1: 

4. As DUKE is clearly identifiable as being a member of selection set 1, click the 

Highlight toolbar button to turn off the Highlighter. 

5. Hide the Search Bar results, to do this, click Hide Results. 


Using Visual Search to Find a Chart Item 

Using Visual Search to Find a Chart Item 9.3 

You can analyze the contents of your chart using the Visual Search tool. 

Visual Search enables you to search for: 

• a single entity 

• linked entities 

For more information on using Visual Search to find linked entities, refer to 

Searching for Entity and Link Types on page 278. 

Single entity Searches all of the entities on your chart to find those that match the conditions 

you specify. It does not take into account whether an entity is linked in any way to 

another entity. 

In the example below, Visual Search has found a single Female entity whose 

identity contains Mel MELDREW and whose Date of Birth is 26 October 1960. 

478 TRL 



Pentland Leasing 

Bob JONES 

20 Feb 1948 

Drugs 

Money 

Unknown male 

Associates 

Mel MELDREW 

26 Oct 1960 

Drugs 

Money 

Jack DAVIDSON 

6 Oct 1952 

Alias 

Margaret CASTE 

26 Oct 1960

How do I find chart items using Visual Search? 


The only information that you have about the second suspect is that he is male, 

living in Whitford, and known as SMITHSON. There are two SMITHSON entities on 

this chart. You could use Find Text, but that will find both entities. As you are only 

interested in a SMITHSON who lives in Whitford, a more appropriate way of finding 

him is to use Visual Search. To use Visual Search to find SMITHSON living in 

Whitford: 

1. From the Analysis menu, select Visual Search to display the Visual Search 

dialog, and click the Single Entity tab to display the Single Entity page, if it is 

not already displayed. 

2. Click Reset to make sure that the Visual Search settings are set to their default 

values. 

3. You know that SMITHSON is a male. From the Type drop-down list, select 

Male. 

4. From the Identity/Label drop-down list, select Identity. 

5. From the Condition drop-down list, select equal to. 

6. In the Value box, type SMITHSON. 


Using Visual Search to Find a Chart Item 

Summary 

Value box 

Condition 

drop-down list 

7. You want to search for any instances of the Address attribute class associated 

with a SMITHSON entity on your chart that contain Whitford. From the 

Attribute Class drop-down list, select Address. 

8. From the Condition drop-down list, select contains, and in the Value box type 

Whitford. 

As you add search conditions to the Visual Search dialog it is updated with a 

summary of the conditions that you specify: 

9. Click OK to perform the search. 

10. When you receive the message that one chart item has been selected, click 

OK. 

11. The SMITHSON entity living in Whitford is selected on your chart. Add this 

entity to Selection Set 2. Use the same method that you used to create 

Selection Set 1 in How do I create a selection set? on page 254, making sure 

that you select 2 and not 1 from the Choose Set drop-down list. 

SMITHSON 

Whitford 



Finding a Path Between Two Entities on a Chart 9.4 

You can search for paths between entities on a chart. For example, you may know 

two targets on a chart but need to find any paths between the two targets. You can 

use the Find Path tool to find a path between two entities on a chart following: 

• the direction of any links 

• only links that have a specific attribute 

• only entities that have a specific attribute 

In the example below, Find Path has found a path between AUSTIN and JONES 

that you may want to further investigate: 

Attendee 

AUSTIN Meeting 

Second Interstate 


Attendee 

SMITH 

4546-4689 

Attendee 


Meeting 

Attendee 

JONES 

Note: You can also use Find Path to find paths between items in chronological order, for 

example to analyze telephone billing information or financial transactions. For 

further information on how to do this, refer to Chapter 12, Exploring Relationships. 


Finding a Path Between Two Entities on a Chart 

How do I find a path between two entities on a chart? 

SMITHSON and DUKE are both known to have attended meetings, but you do not 

know if they have both attended the same meetings. Analyze your chart using Find 

Path to see if there is a path between SMITHSON and DUKE; if they have 

attended the same meeting, they may be associates. To do this: 

1. Press 1 to restore Selection Set 1. DUKE is selected on your chart. 

2. Press Ctrl+2 to restore Selection Set 2. SMITHSON is selected on your chart. 

3. From the Analysis menu, select Find Path to display the Find Path dialog. 

4. Click Reset to make sure the Find Path settings are set to their default values. 

5. You do not need to change the Find Path settings for this operation. Click OK to 

perform the search for a path. 

6. When you receive the message that one path containing four links has been 

found, click OK. 


The path between DUKE and SMITHSON is selected on your chart. 

DUKE 

Compton 


GAMBLES 


Meeting WARD 

C hilv ille 

Meeting 

SMITHSON 

Whitford 

Meeting 

Meeting 

SMITH 

Meeting 


Finding Linked Chart Items 

Finding Linked Chart Items 9.5 

You have already seen how you can use Visual Search and Find Path to find items 

on your chart and the paths between them. You can also find other chart items that 

may be linked to a chart item using Find Linked. 

You can set the search depth of a Find Linked operation, for example a search 

depth of one (1) will find just those entities that are linked one level away from the 

selection. In the example chart below, a search depth of one has found that the 

original selected chart item, KENT, is linked to a Meeting: 

Attendee 

Attendee 

Meeting 

Attendee 


KENT 

Attendee 

Associates 

Meeting 

DUPLEASE 

MELDREW 

CORNEY 

JOHNSON 

Attendee Attendee 


Alias 

Attendee 

JONES


A search depth of two (2) will find just those entities that are linked two levels away 

from the original selected chart item. In the example chart below, a search depth of 

two has found that the original selected chart item, KENT, is linked to a Meeting 

and DUPLEASE: 

KENT 

Attendee 

Attendee 

Associates 

Meeting DUPLEASE 

MELDREW 

Attendee 

Meeting 

Attendee 

CORNEY 

JOHNSON 



Alias 

If you choose not to specify a search depth there is no limit to the depth of the 

search being performed. All entities and links, regardless of the number of levels 

from the original selected chart item, will be selected. 

KENT 

Attendee 

Attendee 

Attendee 

As with Find Path, you can also specify conditions when performing a Find Linked 

operation, such as whether to follow link directions, or take account of dates and 

times, links with attributes, or entities with attributes. 

Attendee 

JONES 

Attendee 

Associates 

Meeting DUPLEASE 

MELDREW 

Meeting 

CORNEY 

JOHNSON 



Alias 

Attendee 

JONES 



How do I find further items linked to a chart item? 

When you performed the Find Path operation between SMITHSON and DUKE it 

revealed that a third male, WARD, may be related in some way to the investigation. 

Find out if WARD is linked to any other people on the chart to see if he is a key 

player in the investigation. To do this: 

1. Click on the chart background to deselect any selected chart items, and select 

WARD. 

2. From the Analysis menu, select Find Linked, to display the Find Linked 

dialog. Click Reset to make sure the Find Linked settings are set to their default 

values. 

3. You know the meetings that are directly linked to WARD but you also want to 

know if he is linked to other people who may be two levels away from him on 

the chart. In the Search Depth box, type 2. 

4. Click OK to select the linked items. 

5. When the message is displayed that eleven entities and eleven links have been 

added, click OK. 


The following entities are selected on the chart: 

• WARD 

• all entities that are linked two levels from WARD on the chart 

• all links that are linked two levels from WARD on the chart 

Anonymous 

DUKE Meeting 

Compton 

SMITHSON 

Whitford 

DOWN 

Meeting 

WARD 

Chilville 

Meeting 

SMITH 

Meeting 

CASTE 

Bedworth 

Meeting 


JONES 


PRESCOTT 

Boltby 

TAYLOR 

Hockley 

Meeting 



How do I reverse the selection on a chart? 

You want to concentrate on the relationships between WARD and the selected 

people on the chart. The other items on this chart are distracting. Invert the 

selection to select those items that are not currently selected and deselect the 

items that are selected. To do this: 

1. From the Edit menu, select Invert Selection. 

2. All of the chart items that were selected are deselected and all of the chart 

items that were not selected are now selected. 

Warning: Do not click on the chart background as this will lose the selection. 

How do I hide items from view? 

When you have selected all of the chart items that you are not interested in, you 

can hide them. When you hide chart items, they will not be displayed on the chart 

and you will not be able to edit them or see them in the List Items dialog until you 

choose to show them again. To hide the items that are selected on your chart: 

1. From the View menu, select Show and Hide to display the Show and Hide 

dialog. 

2. Make sure that Selected is selected and click Hide. 



3. The chart items that you are not interested in are hidden from view. Click the Fit 

Chart in Window toolbar button to view the entire chart. 

DUKE 

Compton 

Anonymous 

DOWN 

Meeting 

Meeting WARD 

C hilv ille 

Meeting 

SMITHSON 

Whitford 

Meeting 

GAMBLES 

CASTE 

Bedworth 

TAYLOR 

Hockley 



How do I reveal hidden chart items? 

The chart items remaining on your chart show that WARD appears to be a key 

player in this investigation. 

In the next part of this example you will see how you can use chart layouts to 

rearrange chart items to confirm your suspicions about WARD and his associates. 

Before you do this you will have to reveal the items that you have just hidden. To do 

this, from the View menu, select Reveal Hidden. 

All of the items that you chose to hide are displayed again. However, they retain 

their hidden status. Although they are visible they remain hidden items until you 

choose to explicitly show them again. 

To explicitly show all of the items on your chart again: 

1. From the View menu, select Show And Hide to display the Show And Hide 

dialog. 

2. In the Selection Type area, select All and click Show. 

All of the chart items are displayed again. Your chart is now ready to use in the next 

part of this example and should look similar to that below: 

DUKE 

Compton 

Anonymous 

Meeting WARD 

C hilv ille 

Meeting 

SMITHSON 

Whitford 

Meeting 



DOWN 

Meeting 

SMITH 

Meeting 

CASTE 

Bedworth 


JONES 

PRESCOTT Meeting 

Boltby 

TAYLOR 

Hockley 

Meeting 

DUPLEASE 

SMITHSON Meeting 

Staines 

BOSTON 

Knightly 

DAVIS 

Brisley 

MELDREW 

Tamford 

Meeting 

BRIGHTMAN 

Wakeley 

Meeting JAMES 

Tamford 

Meeting 

FISK 

Boltby 


Anonymous 

Meeting 

BISHOP 

Lake Worth 

JOHNSON


Laying out a Chart 9.6 

Grouped 

layout 

When you are analyzing a chart it can often help to lay out the contents of the chart 

in a different way. This can reveal groups of connecting entities and the 

relationships between them, which may provide a different viewpoint. 

The two most useful layouts to use when examining groups of entities and links on 

a chart are: 

• Grouped layout 

• Peacock layout 

We recommend that you try both layouts to see which reveals the most about the 

data in your chart. 

The Grouped layout rearranges your chart to reveal various different groupings of 

interconnected entities, and the relationships between them. It is useful when you 

have a chart that contains many linked entities. A Grouped layout allows you to 

sort entities into different groups, enabling you to identify any entities that are 

members of two or more groups. 

The Grouped layout arranges the contents of your chart so that groups of 

interlinking entities are displayed at the center of the chart and other groups “fan 

out” from this central group. 

The example below shows a chart that has been arranged using a Grouped layout: 


Laying out a Chart 

Peacock 

layout 

The Peacock layout rearranges complex groups of connected entities on your 

chart to attempt to highlight the basic overall structure of a network. 

A Peacock layout groups sets of entities that are linked to one entity on the chart. 

The entities that are linked to this single entity appear as “peacock tails” fanning 

out from the entity. This can make it easier to see groups of activity on a chart. 

The Peacock layout is useful when you have many interlinked entities. It allows you 

to: 

• identify entities at the center of a lot of activity in high volume data, typically 

telephone billing information or financial transactions 

• find further detail about activity within groups of interconnected entities 

The example below shows the chart on page 269, rearranged using a Peacock 

layout: 


How do I layout my chart using a Grouped layout? 


When you performed the Find Linked operation on WARD you found that he 

appeared to be a key player in this investigation. You could also have used a layout 

to change the way the chart was displayed to get the same result. Use a Grouped 

layout to see if this shows you that WARD is a key player. To do this: 

1. Click the Grouped Chart Layout toolbar button. 


It appears that there may be up to three areas of activity on this chart. WARD, 

however indirectly, appears to be connected to all three areas. TAYLOR and FISK 

could also be related to these areas of activity. 

WARD 

TAYLOR 

FISK 

SMITH 

Anonymous 

SMITHSON 

Whitford 

BISHOP 

Lake Worth 

Meeting 

JOHNSON 

GAMBLES 

Meeting 

JONES 

Meeting 

Meeting 

SMITHSON 

Staines 

DUKE 

Compton 

Meeting 

WARD 

Chilville 

Meeting 

TAYLOR 

Hockley 

Meeting 

FISK 

Boltby 

DAVIS 

Brisley 

JAMES 

Tamford 

Meeting 

Meeting 

BRIGHTMAN 

Wakeley 

DUPLEASE 


Meeting 

Meeting 

BOSTON 

Knightly 

Meeting 

Meeting 

MELDREW 

Tamford 

PRESCOTT 

Boltby 

Meeting 

Anonymous 

DOWN 

CASTE 

Bedworth 

Anonymous

Laying out a Chart 

How do I rearrange my chart using a Peacock layout? 

When you rearranged your chart using the Grouped layout it was apparent that 

there could be up to three areas of activity on your chart all concerning three 

individuals, WARD, FISK and TAYLOR. Confirm this by laying your chart out using 

a Peacock layout. To do this: 

1. Click the Peacock Chart Layout toolbar button. 


Performing the Peacock layout has clarified the findings from the Grouped layout. 

There are actually two areas of activity on this chart. Each of these areas are 

linked to three key players: WARD, FISK and TAYLOR. If you wanted to, you could 

now investigate them further. 

WARD 

TAYLOR 

FISK 



SMITH 

JONES 

Meeting 

GAMBLES 

SMITHSON 

Whitford 

SMITHSON 

Staines 

Meeting 

Meeting 

Anonymous 

BISHOP 

Lake Worth 

JOHNSON 

Meeting 

DUKE 

Compton 

Meeting 

WARD 

C hilv ille 

Meeting 

TAYLOR 

Hockley 

Meeting 

FISK 

Boltby 

Anonymous 

Meeting 

Meeting 

JAMES 

Tamford 

Meeting 

Meeting 

BRIGHTMAN 

Wakeley 

DUPLEASE 

DAVIS 

Brisley 

Anonymous 

Meeting 

CASTE 

Bedworth 

DOWN 

MELDREW 

Tamford 

Meeting 

PRESCOTT 

Boltby 

Meeting 

BOSTON 

Knightly


Summary 9.7 


• find items based on the text they contain 

• mark a selection with a selection set 

• perform a simple search 

• find a path between two entities on a chart 

• find chart items that are linked to a selection 

• show and hide information 

• rearrange items on your chart using layouts 


Summary 


Searching Linked Entities 

10 

This example describes ways in which you can use the analysis tools to search the 

contents of a chart. 

Contents 


Searching for Entity and Link Types 278 

Using Entity and Link Conditions in Visual Search 286 

Intersecting and Deleting Selection Sets 292 

Summary 296 


Introduction 



Scenario 


• searching for linked entities 

• adding intermediate results to selection sets 

• searching for entities and links by adding entity and link conditions 

• intersecting and deleting selection sets 



page 17. 






A chart has already been created for you containing transactions between bank 

accounts. Some of these accounts are held by individuals and some are held by 

organizations. 

You believe that some of the individuals are receiving large amounts of money from 

organizations. 

Consider the following strategy to find the accounts receiving amounts greater than 

10000 and their respective account holders: 

• First of all, find all of the organizations on the chart that are account holders of 

any account on the chart using Visual Search, marking the results of this 

search with a selection set. 

• Find all of the entity types that are in the Individuals palette who hold accounts 

on the chart. Add the results of this search to a second selection set. 

• Find all of the transactions between entities in the first selection set and entities 

in the second selection set that are greater than 10000. Add the results of this 

search to a third selection set. 


Chapter 10: Searching Linked Entities 

• Extend the results of your search to find all account holders that are linked in 

any way to transactions over 10000 and add them to the third selection set. 

• Find all entities and links that are members of both the second and third 

selection sets to highlight individuals and accounts that warrant further 

investigation. 

• Finally, create a new chart with the results of the searches and remove any 

selection set attributes from it. 


Searching for Entity and Link Types 

Searching for Entity and Link Types 10.2 

In Chapter 9, Basic Searching you used Visual Search to find a single entity on a 

chart. You can also search for entities that are linked to other entities to find the 

entities and/or the links between them that match the conditions you specify. 

Linked entities In the example chart below, Visual Search has found two entities: Bob JONES and 

Mel MELDREW who are linked with an Associates link type. 

478 TRL 


Visual Search can be used to find linked chart items on simple charts. To find 

linked chart items in more complex charts you may have to perform several Visual 

Search operations to find the chart items of interest. 


Pentland Leasing 

Bob JONES 

20 Feb 1948 

Drugs 

Money 

Unknown male 

Associates 

Mel MELDREW 

26 O ct 1960 

Drugs 

Money 

Jack DAVIDSON 

6 Oct 1952 

Alias 

Margaret CASTE 

26 Oct 1960

How do I search for linked entities using Visual Search? 


A chart has been created for you that shows bank accounts held by individuals and 

organizations and transactions that have taken place between them. Find all of the 

organizations on your chart that hold an account; you are not interested in any of 

the transactions or links so do not select them. To do this: 

1. Open the chart Example 10 initial.anb. To access the folder in which 




Sam GOLDBURG 

William KNAPPENBURGER 

Janet TOTTIER 

27000 

9706-3911 3217-1997 

24000 

25200 

30000 

David GREEN 

35000 

1080 

17532 

1058-4576 0012-3963 

200 600 

80000 

8553-3667 3995-6194 

Mel MELDREW 

90000 

Liz GREEN 

0023-1455 

2359-6356 4546-4646 Marc BAKER 

4989-7999 


1079-7367 

96000 

4916-5428 



save your charts in. Type Example 10 advanced searching.anb in the 

File Name box and click Save. 

6666 

200 

100000 

Dave LOCKE 

Tasha TAYLOR 

Sam STEELE 

5594-8715 

Diamond Trading Kent CORNEY 


200 

912 

David YOUNG 

640 

210 

4550-0021 Susan KENT 

1642-4551 

2359-6357 

5341-4723 Danny KENT 

Anne JONES 

Judith LOCKE


3. From the Analysis menu, select Visual Search to display the Visual Search 

dialog. Click the Linked Entities tab to display the Linked Entities page, if it is 

not already displayed. 

4. Click Reset to make sure the Visual Search settings are set to their default 

values. 

5. Click on the left question mark to select the first entity in your search, and from 

the Type drop-down list, select (semantic type). 

6. In the drop-down list next to the Type drop-down list, select is exactly, and 

then click the Browse button to select the semantic type. 


The Select Entity Semantic Type dialog is displayed: 


7. In the Semantic Types list, click the plus sign next to Legal Entity, and then 

select Organization. This selects the Organization semantic type. Click OK to 

close the Select Entity Semantic Type dialog. 

8. Click on the link between the two question marks to specify the conditions on it, 

and from the Type drop-down list, select Account Holder. 

9. You want to know which accounts are linked to organizations. Click on the right 

question mark to select the second entity to search for, and from the Type 

drop-down list select (semantic type). 

10. From the drop-down list next to the Type drop-down list, select is exactly and 

then click the Browse button to display the Select Entity Semantic Types 

dialog. 

11. In the Semantic Types list, click the plus sign next to Possession, and then the 

plus sign next to Property, and then select Bank Account. Click OK to close 

the Select Entity Semantic Type dialog. 



12. You are only interested in the Organizations and Accounts that are linked with 

an Account Holder link; you are not interested in the links themselves. Turn off 

the Link check box and make sure that the Entity A and Entity B check boxes 

are turned on. 

As you enter conditions the Visual Search dialog is updated so that you can 

see the items on which the search will be performed. 


14. When you receive the message that four chart items have been selected, click 

OK. 


How do I add a selection to a selection set? 


The four entities that have been found by Visual Search are selected on your chart. 

These are: 

— Arcacia Investments 

— Diamond Trading 

— 4989-7999 

— 4916-5428 

Add these selected entities to Selection Set 1. To do this: 

1. Display the Selection Set toolbar, if it is not already displayed; right-click on the 

toolbar and select Selection Sets: 

2. Select 1 from the Choose Set drop-down list on the Selection Set toolbar. 

3. Click the Define Set toolbar button. 

The selected items are added to Selection Set 1. They are displayed with an 

attribute to show that they are members of this selection set: 

4989-7999 


90000 

1079-7367 

96000 

4916-5428 


100000 

Sam STEELE 

5594-8715 

Diamond Trading Kent CORNEY 



How do I find entity types that are members of a palette? 

You want to know which people hold which accounts on your chart. You do not 

know what type of person is an account holder, you know only that all types of 

person are held in the Individuals palette. Find all of the entity types in the 

Individuals palette who are linked to accounts with an Account Holder link. To do 

this: 

1. Press the F5 key to open the Visual Search dialog. The Linked Entities page 

should be displayed, as it was the last one used, but if it is not click the Linked 

Entities tab to display it. 


values. 

3. Click the left question mark and, from the Type drop-down list, select (is 

member of). 

4. From the Palette drop-down list, select Individuals to choose the Individuals 

palette. 

5. Click the link between the two question marks to specify the search conditions 

on it, and from the Type drop-down list, select Account Holder. 

6. You want to know which accounts are linked to people. Click on the right 

question mark to select the second entity in your search, and from the Type 

drop-down list, select Account. 

7. Turn off the Link check box and make sure that the Entity A and Entity B 

check boxes are turned on: 


9. When you receive the message that 31 chart items have been selected, click 

OK. 

10. The 31 items that have been found by Visual Search are selected on your 

chart. With all 31 items still selected, add them to Selection Set 2. How to do 

this is described on page 283; from the Choose Set drop-down list, make sure 

that you select 2. 



The selected items are displayed with an attribute to show that they are members 

of this selection set: 

Sam GOLDBURG 

William KNAPPENBURGER 

Janet TOTTIER 

27000 

9706-3911 3217-1997 

24000 

25200 

30000 

David GREEN 

17532 

1058-4576 0012-3963 


35000 

1080 

80000 

8553-3667 3995-6194 

Mel MELDREW 

90000 

Liz GREEN 

200 

0023-1455 

2359-6356 4546-4646 Marc BAKER 

4989-7999 

1079-7367 

96000 

Arcacia Investments 4916-5428 


600 

6666 

200 

100000 

Dave LOCKE 

Tasha TAYLOR 

Sam STEELE 

5594-8715 

Kent CORNEY 


200 

912 

David YOUNG 

640 

210 

4550-0021 Susan KENT 

1642-4551 

2359-6357 

5341-4723 Danny KENT 

Anne JONES 

Judith LOCKE

Using Entity and Link Conditions in Visual Search 

Using Entity and Link Conditions in Visual Search10.3 

When you are using Visual Search to analyze your chart you can also choose to 

specify conditions on chart items, for example the value on a link, or the direction 

of a link. 

For more information on Visual Search settings, refer to the online help. 

In the example below, Visual Search has found all check transactions between 

accounts that are greater than 500. It has selected just those transactions that flow 

from the original account to the recipient. 


500 

Account 

250 

Account 

200 

450 

500 

250 

5000 

300 1000 4000 

Account 

Account 

Account 

75 

Account 

2500 

Account Account 

Account Account

How do I add a condition to a link in Visual Search? 


Now that you have found all of the organizations and individuals on the chart that 

hold accounts, you are interested in any transactions that are greater than 10000 

between any account held by any organization in Selection Set 1 and any account 

held by a person in Selection Set 2. Perform a Visual Search that finds all of these 

transactions. To do this: 

1. Press the F5 key to display the Visual Search dialog. 


values. 

3. You are interested in any transaction that originated from any account in 

Selection Set 1. Click the left question mark and from the Attribute Class 

drop-down list, select Selection Set 1. 

4. Click on the link between the two question marks, and from the Type 

drop-down list, select Transaction. 

5. From the Direction drop-down list, select from A --> B. 

6. From the Label/Connection drop-down list, select Link Label Value. 

7. From the Condition drop-down list, select greater than and type 10000 in the 

Value box. 

The condition will be displayed in the Visual Search dialog: 



8. You want to know the accounts in Selection Set 2 into which large amounts of 

money have been deposited. Click the right question mark, and from the 

Attribute Class drop-down list, select Selection Set 2. 


10. Click OK to dismiss the message that 7 chart items have been selected. 

11. The 7 items that have been found by Visual Search are selected on your chart. 

With all 7 items still selected, add them to Selection Set 3. How to do this is 

described on page 283; make sure that you select 3 from the Choose Set 

drop-down list. 




of Selection Set 3: 

30000 

4546-4646 Marc BAKER 

1080 

80000 

8553-3667 3995-6194 

Mel MELDREW 

4989-7999 

90000 


1079-7367 

96000 



100000 

4550-0021 

Sam STEELE 

5594-8715 

Kent CORNEY 



How do I further extend the results of a search operation? 

Selection Set 3 contains all of the accounts and transactions between them that 

are greater than 10000. Extend this selection further by finding any account holder 

that is linked to the account. To do this: 

1. Make sure that Selection Set 3 is still selected on your chart. 

Note: Press the 3 key to restore Selection Set 3 if it is not selected. 

2. From the Analysis menu, select Find Linked to display the Find Items Linked 

to Selection dialog. Click the General tab to display the General page if it is not 

already displayed. 

3. Click Reset to make sure that the Find Linked settings are set to their default 

values. 

4. In the Options area, make sure that the Search Depth check box is turned on 

and that its value is set to 1. 

5. Click OK to perform the operation. 

6. Click OK to dismiss the message that 8 links and 8 entities have been selected. 


7. Add all of the account holders to Selection Set 3. To do this: 


a. In the Selection Set toolbar, click on the Choose Set drop-down list, and 

select 3 to select Selection Set 3. 

b. Click the Add to Set toolbar button. The items that were found as a result of 

the Find Linked operation are added to Selection Set 3. 


of Selection Set 3: 

27000 

9706-3911 3217-1997 

24000 

25200 

30000 

35000 

1080 

80000 

8553-3667 3995-6194 

Mel MELDREW 

90000 


0023-1455 

2359-6356 4546-4646 Marc BAKER 

4989-7999 

1079-7367 

96000 



6666 

200 

100000 

Tasha TAYLOR 

4550-0021 

Sam STEELE 

5594-8715 

Kent CORNEY 


Intersecting and Deleting Selection Sets 

Intersecting and Deleting Selection Sets 10.4 

When you are analyzing a chart you may find that, as you add results to selection 

sets, an item is present in more than one selection set. You can intersect selection 

sets to find those items that are present in two selection sets. 

In the example below, some of the chart items are in selection set 3 and some are 

in selection set 4. There is one chart item (the car with license plate 474 TRL) that 

is a member of selection set 3 and selection set 4. This item is in the intersection of 

the two sets and is selected. 

Male 1 

Owner 

SILVERSHADOW 

Package 

Unknown Male 

Mel MELDREW 

Employee 


Money 

Package 

Associates 

Adding items to selection sets is a useful way of recording your search results as 

you analyze a chart. When you have finished analyzing your chart you can remove 

the selection sets. 

You want to know which accounts in Selection Set 3 are also members of Selection 

Set 2. This will find just those individuals and accounts that have received large 

amounts of money from organizations. Find the intersection of the two sets. To do 

this: 

1. In the Selection Sets toolbar, from the Choose Set drop-down list, select 2 and 

click the Select Set toolbar button to select Selection Set 2. 


Oscar's Bar 

Link 


Owner 

23 Arcacia Avenue 

How do I find the intersection of two selection sets? 

Owner 

Owner 

289 LKH 

474 TRL

2. From the Choose Set drop-down list, select 3. 

3. Click the Intersect selection with set toolbar button. 


4. Eight items are selected on your chart. These are the people and the accounts 

that have received transactions for more than 10000: 

— Marc BAKER 

— Sam STEELE 

— 3217-1997 

— 4546-4646 

— 1079-7367 

— 8553-3667 

— 5594-8715 

— 3995-6194 

5. Press Ctrl+C to copy the selection. 

6. Create a new chart based on the User Guide Examples template. Paste the 

selection into this chart. 

Note: When you copied the selection the Account Holder links that were 

attached to the entities were also copied; these have been pasted into 

your new chart. 


Intersecting and Deleting Selection Sets 

Your new chart should look similar to that below: 

8553-3667 

30000 

3217-1997 

35000 

4546-4646 Marc BAKER 

1080 


3995-6194 

1079-7367 

Sam STEELE 

5594-8715

How do I clear a selection set? 


When you were analyzing your chart you added the results of each search to 

selection sets to record intermediate results, making it easy for you to restore the 

selection. When you present this information in the new chart, you do not want the 

selection set attributes to be visible. Clear each of the selection set attributes on 

your chart. To do this: 

1. From the Choose Set drop-down list, select 2, and click the Clear Set toolbar 

button. Selection Set 2 is removed from your chart. 

2. Clear the contents of Selection Set 3 in the same way. 


8553-3667 

30000 

3217-1997 

35000 

4546-4646 

1080 

Marc BAKER 

3995-6194 

1079-7367 

Sam STEELE 

5594-8715 


Summary 

Summary 10.5 


• use Visual Search to find specific entity types 

• select only part of a result of a visual search 

• add entity and link conditions to a visual search, including link directions 

• intersect and delete selection sets 


Temporal Analysis 

11 

This example describes further ways in which you can use the analysis tools. It 

also explains how you can use time-based layouts to display your chart. 

Contents 


Performing Analysis Using Visual Search 299 

Laying Out Your Chart 306 

Creating Charts with Different Perspectives 316 

Summary 318 


Introduction 



Scenario 


• searching for links within a date and time period 

• laying out your chart using different temporal layout styles 

• creating charts containing different perspectives 



page 17. 






Several charts have been created for you. The first chart contains all transactions 

that have taken place between accounts. The second chart contains details 

concerning calls between telephones. 

Some of the transactions on your chart have a Money Transfer attribute. You are 

not interested in any other transaction, so you will need to perform some analysis 

on the first chart to remove the transactions that are not marked with a Money 

Transfer attribute. 

You believe that the time period between 12 November 2006 and 

24 December 2006 is significant and that there may be a link between the 

telephone calls that take place during this period and some of the money transfers. 

You need to analyze the second chart and find just those telephone calls that have 

taken place during this period of time. To see if any pattern emerges you will copy 

these telephone calls into the first chart. Using layout tools you will be able to see 

more clearly which (if any) telephone calls and money transfers are related. 

In addition to this, you will need to merge the contents of a third chart into your 

chart, to show associations between some of the accounts and the telephone 

calls. 


Chapter 11: Temporal Analysis 

Performing Analysis Using Visual Search 11.2 

In Chapter 10, Searching Linked Entities, you used Visual Search to find entities 

and links on your chart that had no date and time. You can also use Visual Search 

to find chart items that have a date and time by setting the appropriate date and 

time conditions. 

How do I search a chart for items with a particular attribute? 

9931-1291 

TownCorp UK 

7811-2371 

5104-2037 


2359-6357 

TownCorp UK 

4922-6321 


20000 

12 Nov 2006 07:48 

YES 

19000 

12 Nov 2006 07:57 

YES 

17000 

12 Nov 2006 08:04 

YES 

25500 

19 Nov 2006 10:10 

YES 

A chart already exists containing transactions between bank accounts. You are 

only interested in the transactions that have a value for the Money Transfer 

attribute class. Find all of the transactions on this chart that have a value for this 

attribute class. To do this: 

1. Open the chart Example 11 financial.anb. To access the folder in which 




Sunday 12th November 2006 20--25th November 2006 25--30th November 2006 1--5th December 2006 5--10th December 2006 10--20th December 2006 Sunday 24th December 2006 

4:00 05:00 06:00 24th 10:00 12:00 15:00 28th 10:30 2nd 3rd 09:11 8th 9th 11:00 12:00 11th 12th 15th 

12:50 13:00 13:10 14:00 

07:40 07:55 

18th 10:20 

07:00 08:04 

08:00 15th 22nd 12:00 

20th 12:00 17:00 

25th 26th 12:00 15:00 

27th 15:10 16:00 

29th 12:00 

12:00 

30th 

1st 

09:00 09:14 09:20 09:30 

10:00 

4th 6th 7th 12:00 

5th 10th 22nd 12:40 20th 24th 

15000 

19 Nov 2006 10:30 

YES 

20000 15000 

23 Nov 2006 10:37 24 Nov 2006 09:30 

13000 

24 Nov 2006 12:00 

20000 

25 Nov 2006 10:00 

10000 

26 Nov 2006 09:15 

18000 

26 Nov 2006 14:27 

20000 

26 Nov 2006 18:08 

10000 18500 

27 Nov 2006 12:44 27 Nov 2006 17:32 

15000 

29 Nov 2006 05:44 

18250 

29 Nov 2006 14:57 

18000 

29 Nov 2006 15:37 

15500 

30 Nov 2006 09:15 

15000 

01 Dec 2006 09:00 

15500 

01 Dec 2006 10:04 

20000 

01 Dec 2006 10:37 

25000 

03 Dec 2006 09:10 

YES 

3400 

03 Dec 2006 09:15 

YES 

11250 15000 

03 Dec 2006 09:37 06 Dec 2006 05:44 

YES 

16000 

24 Dec 2006 12:52 

YES 

15500 

24 Dec 2006 13:09 

YES 

2. The Find toolbar contains buttons associated with finding chart items. If it is not 

already displayed, right-click in the toolbar and select Find to display the Find 

toolbar. 

3. Click the Visual Search toolbar button to display the Visual Search dialog, then 

click the Linked Entities tab to display the Linked Entities page, if it is not 

already displayed. 


values. 

18500 

07 Dec 2006 17:35 

20000 

09 Dec 2006 10:10 

13000 

09 Dec 2006 12:00 

11250 

10 Dec 2006 11:37 

20000 

11 Dec 2006 10:10 

13000 15000 

12 Dec 2006 12:00 20 Dec 2006 16:30 

20000 

24 Dec 2006 12:24 

YES 

17750 

24 Dec 2006 12:44 

YES 


Performing Analysis Using Visual Search 

5. Click on the link between the two question marks. The Visual Search dialog 

changes to display the options relating to links: 

6. You are only interested in those transactions that have a Money Transfer 

attribute. From the Attribute Class drop-down list, select Money Transfer. 



7. The Money Transfer attribute class is of type Flag. The Condition drop-down 

list contains all of the conditions associated with this type of attribute class. 

Select is present from this drop-down list. 

The condition that Visual Search will use to find items on the chart is displayed 

in the center of the Visual Search dialog, below the link. 

8. You want to select all of the entities and links on your chart. In the Apply To 

area, make sure that the check boxes Entity A, Entity B, and Link are all 

turned on. 


10. When you receive the message that Visual Search has selected 17 items on 

your chart, click OK. 



9931-1291 

TownCorp UK 

7811-2371 

5104-2037 


2359-6357 

TownCorp UK 

4922-6321 


20000 

12 Nov 2006 07:48 

YES 

19000 

12 Nov 2006 07:57 

YES 

17000 

12 Nov 2006 08:04 

YES 

25500 

19 Nov 2006 10:10 

YES 

The 17 items that Visual Search has found are selected on your chart: 

Sunday 12th November 2006 20--25th November 2006 25--30th November 2006 1--5th December 2006 5--10th December 2006 10--20th December 2006 Sunday 24th December 2006 

4:00 05:00 06:00 24th 10:00 12:00 15:00 28th 10:30 2nd 3rd 09:11 8th 9th 11:00 12:00 11th 12th 15th 

12:50 13:00 13:10 14:00 

07:40 07:55 

18th 10:20 

07:00 08:04 

08:00 15th 22nd 12:00 

20th 12:00 17:00 

25th 26th 12:00 15:00 

27th 15:10 16:00 

29th 12:00 

12:00 

30th 

1st 

09:00 09:14 09:20 09:30 

10:00 

4th 6th 7th 12:00 

5th 10th 22nd 12:40 20th 24th 

15000 

19 Nov 2006 10:30 

YES 

20000 15000 

23 Nov 2006 10:37 24 Nov 2006 09:30 

13000 

24 Nov 2006 12:00 

20000 

25 Nov 2006 10:00 

10000 

26 Nov 2006 09:15 

18000 

26 Nov 2006 14:27 

20000 

26 Nov 2006 18:08 

10000 18500 

27 Nov 2006 12:44 27 Nov 2006 17:32 

15000 

29 Nov 2006 05:44 

18250 

29 Nov 2006 14:57 

18000 

29 Nov 2006 15:37 

15500 

30 Nov 2006 09:15 

15000 

01 Dec 2006 09:00 

How do I delete the unselected items? 

15500 

01 Dec 2006 10:04 

20000 

01 Dec 2006 10:37 

25000 

03 Dec 2006 09:10 

YES 

Visual Search has selected all the transactions that have values for the Money 

Transfer attribute class. It has also selected the accounts at each end of the 

transactions. You are not interested in any other transactions on the chart so you 

can delete them. To do this, simply invert the selection on the chart so that the 

items not selected become selected and vice versa. Select all of the transactions 

on the chart and delete them. To do this: 

1. From the Edit menu, select Invert Selection. This deselects all of the Money 

Transfer transactions and selects all of the items that were not found by the 

search. 

2. Press the Delete key to remove them from the chart. 


3400 

03 Dec 2006 09:15 

YES 

11250 15000 

03 Dec 2006 09:37 06 Dec 2006 05:44 

YES 

18500 

07 Dec 2006 17:35 

20000 

09 Dec 2006 10:10 

13000 

09 Dec 2006 12:00 

11250 

10 Dec 2006 11:37 

20000 

11 Dec 2006 10:10 

13000 15000 

12 Dec 2006 12:00 20 Dec 2006 16:30 

20000 

24 Dec 2006 12:24 

YES 

17750 

24 Dec 2006 12:44 

YES 

16000 

24 Dec 2006 12:52 

YES 

15500 

24 Dec 2006 13:09 

YES

9931-1291 

TownCorp UK 

7811-2371 

5104-2037 


2359-6357 

TownCorp UK 

4922-6321 


20000 

12 Nov 2006 07:48 

YES 

19000 

12 Nov 2006 07:57 

YES 

17000 

12 Nov 2006 08:04 

YES 

25500 

19 Nov 2006 10:10 

YES 

15000 

19 Nov 2006 10:30 

YES 

Your chart will now look similar to that below: 

25000 

03 Dec 2006 09:10 

YES 

3400 

03 Dec 2006 09:15 

YES 

11250 

03 Dec 2006 09:37 

YES 


Sunday 12th November 2006 15--20th November 2006 20--25th November 2006 25--30th November 2006 1--5th December 2006 5--10th December 2006 10--15th December 2006 15--20th December 2006 Sunday 24th December 2006 

4:00 05:00 06:00 18th 10:20 12:00 

22nd 12:00 23rd 12:00 28th 12:00 

3rd 09:00 09:13 6th 7th 8th 9th 11th 12th 13th 14th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th 

12:50 13:00 13:10 14:00 

07:40 07:55 

07:00 08:04 

08:00 15th 12:00 12:00 

20th 12:00 12:00 

21st 12:00 

12:00 

24th 12:00 12:00 

25th 

26th 27th 12:00 

29th 12:00 

30th 

1st 

2nd 09:20 09:30 4th 5th 10th 21st 22nd 23rd 12:40 20th 

24th 12:30 

3. From the File menu, select Save As to save the chart. Click OK on the Cover 


save your charts in. Type Example 11 Money Transfers Only.anb in 


Do not close this chart as you will be analyzing it further in the next part of this 

example. 

How do I find happenings that took place during a period of time? 

02073 871 117 

07787 563 412 

N/K 

643 098 5784 

SMITHSON 


11 Nov 2006 09:33 

You have received a second chart containing telephone calls. You think that there 

may be a connection between the dates and times of the money transfers and the 

dates and times of the telephone calls. Find all of the telephone calls that took 

place between 12 November 2006, and 24 December 2006, and add this 

information to your Money Transfers Only chart. To do this: 

Telephone Call Telephone Call 

11 Nov 2006 11 10:30 Nov 2006 11:31 

1. Open the chart Example 11 telephone.anb. 

Saturday 11th November 2006 Sunday 12th November 2006 20--30th November 2006 1--10th December 2006 20--25th December 2006 Mond 

08:00 09:00 10:00 10:20 11:00 11:30 12:00 00:00 08:30 12:00 13:00 00:00 15th 19th 20th 09:00 25th 06:00 27th 06:00 29th 30th 07:40 12:00 1st 

2nd 16:00 4th 10th 19:00 20:30 21:00 22:00 00:00 01:20 02:00 


12 Nov 2006 12:20 

07786 162 534 


Telephone Call Telephone Call Telephone Call Telephone Telephone Call Telephone Call Call Diverted Telephone to Call Telephone Diverted Call to 

11 Nov 2006 11 09:39 Nov 2006 11 10:24 Nov 2006 11:20 11 Nov 2006 12 Nov 12:00 12 12 2006 Nov 2006 06:01 2006 08:01 08:09 12 Nov 2006 12 Nov 12:20 2006 12:58 15 Nov 19 2006 Nov 00:01 2006 12:20 

Telephone Telephone Call Telephone Call Call Telephone Telephone Call CallTelephone 

Call Telephone Call 

07458 577 938 

11 Nov 2006 11 10:01 Nov 11 2006 Nov 10:27 2006 11 11:01 Nov 2006 11 Nov 11:44 2006 12:13 12 Nov 2006 08:34 12 Nov 2006 12:25 

KENT 



11 Nov 2006 09:00 11 Nov 2006 10:03 

12 Nov 2006 08:57 

Telephone Telephone Call Call Telephone Telephone Call Call Telephone Telephone Call Telephone Call Telephone Call Call Telephone Call Telephone Call 

14 Nov 2006 16 Nov 23:24 2006 01:55 24 Nov 24 2006 Nov 09:04 2006 17:03 26 Nov 27 2006 Nov 2006 28 11:44 Nov 23:49 2006 29 Nov 06:45 2006 18:18 30 Nov 2006 01 08:18 Dec 2006 09:30 


12 Nov 2006 13:10 


19 Nov 2006 12:20 


19 Nov 2006 12:25 


19 Nov 2006 13:10 


26 Nov 2006 09:07 

Telephone Call Telephone Call Telephone Call 

24 Nov 2006 07:36 25 Nov 2006 11:4728 

Nov 2006 00:45 


28 Nov 2006 16:28 


30 Nov 2006 07:39 


30 Nov 2006 07:40 


03 Dec 2006 17:23 

Telephone Call Diverted toTelephone 

Telephone Call Call Telephone Telephone Call Call 

01 Dec 2006 11:15 03 Dec 2006 04 17:23 Dec 24 2006 Dec 2006 12:0918:30 

24 Dec 2006 24 Dec 20:30 2006 21:00 


30 Nov 2006 16:56 03 Dec 2006 15:28 


03 Dec 2006 15:3024 

Dec 2006 16:53 


24 Dec 2006 20:00 

20000 

24 Dec 2006 12:24 

YES 

17750 

24 Dec 2006 12:44 

YES 

Telephone Call Telephone Call Telephone Telephone Call Call 

03 Dec 2006 18:01 24 Dec 2006 19:15 24 Dec 24 2006 Dec 2006 21:2022:00 

16000 

24 Dec 2006 12:52 

YES 


25 Dec 2006 01:05 

Telephone Telephone Call Call Call 

24 Dec 24 2006 25 Dec Dec 2006 22:37 2006 23:02 00:06 

2. Press the F5 key to display the Visual Search dialog and click the Linked 

Entities tab to display the Linked Entities page, if it is not already displayed. 

15500 

24 Dec 2006 13:09 

YES 




values. 

4. Click on the link between the two question marks to select it. 

5. From the Date & Time drop-down list, select Date. 

6. You are interested in a particular time period during which the telephone calls 

took place. From the Condition drop-down list, select between. 

7. In the top drop-down list enter 12 Nov 2006 as the start date. In the bottom 

drop-down list enter 24 Dec 2006 as the end date for the time period. 

The condition that Visual Search will use to find items on the chart is displayed 

in the center of the Visual Search dialog, on the link. 

8. You want to select all of the entities and links on your chart. In the Apply To 

area, make sure that the check boxes Entity A, Entity B, and Link, are turned 

on. 



9931-1291 

TownCorp UK 

7811-2371 

5104-2037 


2359-6357 

TownCorp UK 

4922-6321 


02073 871 117 

07786 162 534 


07787 563 412 

N/K 

07458 577 938 

KENT 

643 098 5784 

SMITHSON 

20000 

12 Nov 2006 07:48 

YES 


12 Nov 2006 06:01 

19000 

12 Nov 2006 07:57 

YES 

17000 

12 Nov 2006 08:04 

YES 


10. When you receive the message that Visual Search has selected 55 items on 


11. The 55 items that Visual Search has found are selected on your chart. From 

the Edit menu, select Copy Selection Only, to copy just those telephone calls 

that took place during the time period and the telephone numbers at each end. 

Note: If you had simply copied the selected chart items, all of the items and 

their associated links and entities would have been selected. The Copy 

Selection Only command copies only those items that are selected on 

the chart. 

12. Make the Money Transfers Only chart the active chart. 

13. Press Ctrl+V to paste the telephone calls from the chart Example 11 

telephone.anb into your current chart (Money Transfers Only.anb). 

Telephone Call Telephone Call Diverted Telephone to Call Telephone Call 

12 Nov 2006 08:01 12 Nov 2006 08:09 12 Nov 2006 12 Nov 12:20 2006 12:58 15 Nov 2006 00:01 


12 Nov 2006 08:34 12 Nov 2006 12:25 

Note: If the telephone call items are pasted on top of the existing chart items, 

move them so that you can clearly see all of the chart items. With the 

pasted items still selected, click on one of the items and, while holding 

down the left mouse button, drag them below the existing items in the 

chart. Release the left mouse button. 


Sunday 12th November 2006 Sunday 12th November 2006 Sunday 12th November 2006 Sunday 19th November 2006 20--30th November 2006 Friday 1st December 2006 Saturday 2nd December 2006 Sunday 3rd December 2006 10--20th December 2006 Sunday 24th December 2006 

02:00 03:00 04:00 06:00 07:50 07:55 

08:05 08:08 08:30 

10:20 12:00 12:22 12:24 

06:00 27th 06:00 29th 12:00 15:00 18:00 21:00 

09:00 12:00 15:00 09:13 09:20 09:30 12:00 

12th 15th 17th 

13:30 15:00 18:00 

00:00 13th 17th 18th 01:00 05:00 

13:00 

08:00 

12:00 

15th 09:00 09:00 

06:00 00:00 25th 

30th 

00:00 

03:00 00:00 03:00 06:00 21:00 

18:00 

00:00 00:00 5th 6th 7th 8th 

06:00 15:29 16:00 

09:00 

10th 22nd 12:40 12:50 

20th 

24th 00:00 

12:30 13:00 20:00 22:00 23:10 

21:00 


12 Nov 2006 12:20 


12 Nov 2006 08:57 

Telephone Telephone Call Call 

14 Nov 2006 16 Nov 23:24 2006 01:55 


12 Nov 2006 13:10 

25500 

19 Nov 2006 10:10 

YES 

15000 

19 Nov 2006 10:30 

YES 


19 Nov 2006 12:20 

Diverted to 

19 Nov 2006 12:20 


19 Nov 2006 12:25 

Telephone Telephone Call Call Telephone Telephone Call Telephone Call Telephone Call Call Telephone Call Telephone Call 

24 Nov 24 2006 Nov 09:04 2006 17:03 26 Nov 27 2006 Nov 2006 28 11:44 Nov 23:49 2006 29 Nov 06:45 2006 18:18 30 Nov 2006 01 08:18 Dec 2006 09:30 


19 Nov 2006 13:10 


26 Nov 2006 09:07 

Telephone Call Telephone Call Telephone Call 

24 Nov 2006 07:36 25 Nov 2006 11:4728 

Nov 2006 00:45 


30 Nov 2006 07:39 


28 Nov 2006 16:28 


30 Nov 2006 07:40 


01 Dec 2006 11:15 


30 Nov 2006 16:56 

14. From the File menu, select Save As, to save the chart. Click OK on the Cover 


save your charts in. Type Example 11 Combined Calls and 

Transfers.anb in the File Name box and click Save. 

Do not close this chart. 

25000 

03 Dec 2006 09:10 

YES 

3400 

03 Dec 2006 09:15 

YES 

11250 

03 Dec 2006 09:37 

YES 


03 Dec 2006 15:28 


03 Dec 2006 17:23 

Diverted toTelephone 

Call 

03 Dec 2006 04 17:23 Dec 2006 12:09 


03 Dec 2006 15:30 


03 Dec 2006 18:01 

20000 

24 Dec 2006 12:24 

YES 

17750 

24 Dec 2006 12:44 

YES 

16000 

24 Dec 2006 12:52 

YES 

15500 

24 Dec 2006 13:09 

YES 



24 Dec 2006 20:00 

Telephone Call Telephone Telephone Call Call 

24 Dec 2006 18:30 24 Dec 2006 24 Dec 20:30 2006 21:00 


24 Dec 2006 16:53 


24 Dec 2006 19:15 


24 Dec 24 2006 Dec 2006 22:3723:02 


24 Dec 24 2006 Dec 2006 21:2022:00

Laying Out Your Chart 

Laying Out Your Chart 11.3 

Grouped By 

Time layout 

Telephone 1 

Telephone 2 

Analyst’s Notebook has a range of chart layouts that allow you to display the 

time-based, or temporal, aspects of your information. 

These temporal layouts are as follows: 

• Grouped By Time 

Items that occur at similar times are displayed close together. 

• Ordered 

Spaces out all the items on your chart evenly. 

• Proportional 

Maintains a uniform distance in accordance with time intervals. 

Note: In addition to the temporal layouts listed above, there are other layouts which allow 

you to display items on your chart without taking temporal aspects into account. 

For further information on all of the layouts, refer to the online help. 

The Grouped By Time layout arranges items from left to right across your chart in 

groups. Any happenings with similar dates and times are displayed close together. 

Consecutive controlling items (those with date and time, and order) are separated 

by a short distance if the time difference is within the specified limit, and a longer 

distance otherwise. 

The Grouped By Time layout is useful for: 

• high volume imported data with dates and times, for example, to find bursts of 

activity in telephone or financial data 

• reducing the width of a chart where items have been laid out proportionally and 

do not fit in the chart window 

Note: Your chart must have at least two controlling items on it to apply a Grouped By 

Time layout. 

01 Jan 2006 03:00 

In the example below, periods of high activity telephone calls that occur within half 

an hour of each other have been grouped: 

01 Jan 2006 04:00 

01 Jan 2006 04:30 

01 Jan 2006 05:00 

01 Jan 2006 05:15 

01 Jan 2006 05:30 

01 Jan 2006 06:05 


01 Jan 2006 06:30 

01 Jan 2006 07:00 

01 Jan 2006 07:03 

01 Jan 2006 06:00 

01 Jan 2006 06:01


Ordered layout The Ordered layout evenly spaces out all of the items on your chart from left to 

right. This layout operates on all chart items, whether or not they are controlling. 

Telephone 1 

Telephone 2 

Proportional 

layout 

The Ordered layout is useful when: 

• you have imported a volume of data and need to apply an initial layout 

• analyzing high volumes of data, particularly that with date and time 

• presenting and printing 

Ordered layouts almost always take up less room left to right on a chart than 

Grouped By Time or Proportional layouts. 

When you apply an Ordered layout the distance between adjacent items is fixed; it 

does not take into account the date and time of items. The resulting chart, 

therefore, will be displayed non-proportionally. 

In the example below, items that are an hour apart have the same gap between 

them as items that are a day or a month apart. The flow of time is adjusted while 

the distance between items remains constant. 

01 Jan 2006 03:00 

01 Jan 2006 04:00 

01 Jan 2006 04:30 

01 Jan 2006 05:00 

01 Jan 2006 05:15 

01 Jan 2006 05:30 

01 Jan 2006 06:05 

The Proportional layout lays out items on the chart with a uniform distance for time 

intervals. Items with date and time are spaced apart exactly as they are in relation 

to each other in time. 

The Proportional layout is most useful: 

01 Jan 2006 06:30 

• for visualizing busy and slack periods and contrasting their relative durations 

• when you have a chart with a sequence of happenings 

It displays an accurate representation of when items occur in relation to each 

other. This can help you see how happenings occur in real time, but it can 

result in very wide charts with items spaced far apart. 

• when importing data, for example telephone data 

01 Jan 2006 07:00 

01 Jan 2006 07:03 

01 Jan 2006 06:00 

01 Jan 2006 06:01 

• provide an initial view of how the data is structured, before applying other 

layouts 



Telephone 1 

01 Jan 2006 03:00 

Telephone 2 

• to fit all the items on your chart into a defined width, whether or not they are 

controlling 

Note: The appearance of your chart after you have applied a Proportional layout will 

depend on the data in your chart, and the time gaps between items. 

In the example below, items ten minutes apart are separated by a gap twice the 

size of that for items five minutes apart: 

01 Jan 2006 04:00 

01 Jan 2006 04:30 

01 Jan 2006 05:00 

01 Jan 2006 05:15 

01 Jan 2006 05:30 

How do I lay out items evenly across a chart? 

You have created a combined chart containing both telephone calls and money 

transfer transactions. You want to be able to see the labels on all the links easily. 

One way to do this is to space the happenings evenly across the chart using an 

Ordered layout. To do this: 

1. Click the Layout Setup toolbar button. The Setup Layouts dialog is displayed. 

Select Ordered to display the Ordered page: 


01 Jan 2006 06:05 

01 Jan 2006 06:30 

01 Jan 2006 07:00 

01 Jan 2006 07:03 

01 Jan 2006 06:00 

01 Jan 2006 06:01

9931-1291 

TownCorp UK 

7811-2371 

5104-2037 


2359-6357 

TownCorp UK 

4922-6321 


02073 871 117 

07786 162 534 


07787 563 412 

N/K 

07458 577 938 

KENT 

643 098 5784 

SMITHSON 

20000 

12 Nov 2006 07:48 

YES 


12 Nov 2006 06:01 

19000 

12 Nov 2006 07:57 

YES 

17000 

12 Nov 2006 08:04 

YES 


12 Nov 2006 08:01 


2. The time period you are interested in is between 12 November 2006 and 24 

December 2006. In the Apply To area, select Specified Period. In the From 

drop-down list, set the date and time to be 12 Nov 2006. In the To drop-down 

list, set the date and time to be 24 Dec 2006. 

3. In the Separate Items By box enter 0.8 inches (2 centimeters). 


5. Click the Ordered Chart Layout toolbar button. 

The items on the chart that fall within the specified time period are rearranged 

so that they are evenly spaced. 


Sunday 12th November 2006 Sunday 12th November 2006 Sunday 12th November 2006 Sunday 19th November 2006 20--25th November 2006 25--30th November 2006 1st December 2006 Sunday 3rd December 2006 Sunday 24th December 2006 Sunday 24th December 2006 Sunday 24th December 2006 

04:00 05:00 06:00 08:00 08:02 08:05 09:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 

11:00 12:00 12:21 12:23 23rd 08:00 12:00 06:00 12:00 29th 00:00 

09:00 10:30 00:00 15:10 15:30 16:00 13:00 15:00 17:00 18:00 19:00 19:30 20:00 20:30 

21:30 22:00 00:00 00:00 23:40 

01:00 02:00 03:00 07:55 

12:22 12:30 13:00 

07:00 08:10 08:45 

07:50 

08:30 

12:00 16th 18th 10:20 12:30 

15th 12:00 10:00 

00:00 25th 

26th 27th 01:00 28th 07:39:40 

30th 07:00 08:00 12:00 

00:00 09:12 09:15 09:30 16:30 

00:00 10th 12:45 12:50 

12:00 

17:50 

17:00 17:30 

20th 12:30 00:00 

22:30 

21:00 

23:00 


12 Nov 2006 08:09 


12 Nov 2006 08:34 


12 Nov 2006 08:57 


12 Nov 2006 12:20 

Diverted to 

12 Nov 2006 12:20 


12 Nov 2006 12:58 


14 Nov 2006 23:24 


12 Nov 2006 12:25 


12 Nov 2006 13:10 


15 Nov 2006 00:01 

25500 

19 Nov 2006 10:10 

YES 


16 Nov 2006 01:55 

15000 

19 Nov 2006 10:30 

YES 


19 Nov 2006 12:20 

Diverted to 

19 Nov 2006 12:20 


24 Nov 2006 07:36 


24 Nov 2006 24 09:04 Nov 2006 17:03 


19 Nov 2006 12:25 


19 Nov 2006 13:10 


26 Nov 2006 09:07 



25 Nov 2006 11:47 

28 Nov 2006 00:45 


26 Nov 2006 27 11:44 Nov 2006 23:49 


28 Nov 2006 06:45 


28 Nov 2006 16:28 


29 Nov 2006 18:18 


30 Nov 2006 07:39 


30 Nov 2006 07:40 

From the File menu, select Save As, to save the chart. Click OK on the Cover 

Sheet dialog to display the Save As dialog. Select the folder you created to save 

your charts in. Type Example 11 Ordered.anb in the File Name box and click 

Save. 

25000 

03 Dec 2006 09:10 

YES 


01 Dec 2006 11:15 


30 Nov 2006 16:56 


30 Nov 2006 08:18 


01 Dec 2006 09:30 

3400 

03 Dec 2006 09:15 

YES 

11250 

03 Dec 2006 09:37 

YES 


03 Dec 2006 15:28 



03 Dec 2006 15:30 


03 Dec 2006 17:23 

Diverted to 

03 Dec 2006 17:23 


03 Dec 2006 18:01 

20000 

24 Dec 2006 12:24 

YES 


04 Dec 2006 12:09 

17750 

24 Dec 2006 12:44 

YES 

16000 

24 Dec 2006 12:52 

YES 

15500 

24 Dec 2006 13:09 

YES 


24 Dec 2006 18:30 


24 Dec 2006 20:00 


24 Dec 2006 16:53 


24 Dec 2006 19:15 


24 Dec 2006 20:30 24 Dec 2006 21:00 


24 Dec 2006 21:20 24 Dec 2006 22:00 


24 Dec 2006 22:37 24 Dec 2006 23:02


. 

How do I lay out items proportionally across a chart? 

A proportional layout will show items with date and time spaced apart exactly as 

they are in relation to each other in time. To do this: 


Select Proportional to display the Proportional page: 

2. In the Apply To area make sure that Entire Chart is selected. 

3. The time period that you are interested in covers more than a month. It would 

be more sensible to lay out the items on this chart so that they are separated by 

the days. In the Width area, select Specify Timescale and, from the 

drop-down list, select Days. 


5. Click the Proportional Chart Layout toolbar button to apply a proportional 

layout. 

The items on the chart are rearranged so that they are proportionally spaced 

across the chart. 


9931-1291 

TownCorp UK 

7811-2371 

5104-2037 


2359-6357 

TownCorp UK 

4922-6321 


02073 871 117 

07786 162 534 


07787 563 412 

N/K 

07458 577 938 

KENT 

643 098 5784 

SMITHSON 

20000 

12 Nov 2006 07:48 

YES 

19000 

12 Nov 2006 07:57 

YES 

17000 

12 Nov 2006 08:04 

YES 


12 Nov 2006 12:20 

Telephone Telephone Diverted Call 

Call to Call 

12 12 Nov 12 Nov Nov 2006 2006 2006 06:01 08:01 08:09 12:20 12:58 

Telephone Call Call 

12 12 Nov Nov 2006 2006 08:34 12:25 


12 12 Nov Nov 2006 2006 08:57 13:10 


15 Nov 2006 00:01 

Telephone CallTelephone 

Call 

14 Nov 2006 23:24 16 Nov 2006 01:55 


Your chart should now look similar to the chart below. It shows that there are some 

busy periods on the chart when lots of telephone calls are made after some 

transactions, in addition to some quiet periods when very little activity took place: 

nday 12th November 2006 15--20th November 2006 20--25th November 2006 25--30th November 2006 1--5th December 2006 5--10th December 2006 10--15th December 2006 15--20th December 2006 20--25th December 2006 

03:00 04:00 12:00 17th 12:00 18th 12:00 

12:00 22nd 12:00 23rd 12:00 

27th 12:00 28th 12:00 29th 12:00 3rd 12:00 

12:00 7th 12:00 8th 12:00 

12:00 12th 12:00 13th 12:00 

12:00 17th 12:00 18th 12:00 

22nd 12:00 23rd 12:00 24th 12:00 12:00 

05:40 

05:00 

13th 12:00 

14th 12:00 15th 12:00 16th 12:00 

19th 20th 12:00 21st 12:00 

24th 12:00 12:00 

25th 26th 12:00 12:00 

30th 1st 

2nd 12:00 4th 12:00 5th 12:00 6th 12:00 9th 10th 12:00 12:00 

11th 12:00 

14th 12:00 15th 16th 12:00 

19th 20th 21st 23:10 00:00 

12:00 

25500 

19 Nov 2006 10:10 

YES 

15000 

19 Nov 2006 10:30 

YES 


19 Nov 2006 12:20 

Diverted to 

19 Nov 2006 12:20 


19 Nov 2006 12:25 


19 Nov 2006 13:10 


26 Nov 2006 09:07 


24 Nov 2006 07:36 25 Nov 2006 11:47 


28 Nov 2006 00:45 

Telephone Telephone Call Call Telephone Call Telephone Call Call Telephone Telephone Call Call Telephone Call 

24 Nov 24 Nov 2006 2006 09:04 17:03 26 Nov 2006 11:44 27 Nov 28 Nov 2006 2006 23:49 06:45 29 Nov 30 2006 Nov 18:18 2006 08:18 01 Dec 2006 09:30 



your charts in. Type Example 11 Proportional.anb in the File Name box and 

click Save. 



28 Nov 2006 16:28 


30 Nov 2006 07:39 01 Dec 2006 11:15 


30 Nov 2006 16:56 


30 Nov 2006 07:40 

25000 

03 Dec 2006 09:10 

YES 

3400 

03 Dec 2006 09:15 

YES 

11250 

03 Dec 2006 09:37 

YES 


03 Dec 2006 17:23 

Diverted Telephone to Call 

03 Dec 2006 04 17:23 Dec 2006 12:09 


03 Dec 2006 15:28 


03 Dec 2006 15:30 


03 Dec 2006 18:01 

20000 

24 Dec 2006 12:24 

YES 

17750 

24 Dec 2006 12:44 

YES 

16000 

24 Dec 2006 12:52 

YES 

15500 

24 Dec 2006 13:09 

YES 


24 Dec 2006 20:00 

Telephone Telephone Call 

Call 

24 24 Dec Dec 2006 2006 18:30 20:30 21:00 


24 Dec 2006 22:37 23:02 


24 Dec 2006 16:53 


24 24 Dec 2006 19:15 21:20 22:00 



. 

How do I group happenings that took place at similar times? 

You have laid out your chart using Ordered and Proportional layouts; you now want 

to display happenings that took place at times that are close together. To do this: 


Select Grouped By Time to display the Grouped By Time page: 

2. In the Apply To area make sure that Entire Chart is selected. 

3. In the Groups area: 

a. Set the Group Items Within to be 1.00 Days. 

b. Specify by how much you want to separate chart items that are within 

groups of activity by setting Separate Items By to be 0.2 inches (0.5 

centimeters). 

c. Specify by how much you want to separate groups of activity on the chart 

by setting Separate Groups By to be 2.0 inches (5 centimeters). 


5. Click the Grouped By Time Chart Layout toolbar button to apply the Grouped 

by Time layout. 


. 

9931-1291 

TownCorp UK 

7811-2371 

5104-2037 


2359-6357 

TownCorp UK 

4922-6321 


02073 871 117 

07786 162 534 


Telephone Telephone Call Telephone Call Call 

12 Nov 2006 12 Nov 06:01 12 2006 Nov 08:01 2006 08:09 

07787 563 412 

N/K 

07458 577 938 

KENT 

643 098 5784 

SMITHSON 

20000 

12 Nov 2006 07:48 

YES 

19000 

12 Nov 2006 07:57 

YES 

17000 

12 Nov 2006 08:04 

YES 


12 Nov 2006 08:34 


12 Nov 12 2006 Nov 12:20 2006 12:58 


12 Nov 2006 12:25 


Your chart will now look similar to that below. All of the happenings that took place 

close to each other in time are displayed in groups: 

Sunday 12th November 2006 Sunday 12th November 2006 15--20th November 2006 20--25th November 2006 25--30th November 2006 1--10th December 2006 20--25th December 2006 

05:00 06:00 08:00 09:00 10:30 12:00 16th 17th 18th 21st 22nd 23rd 24th 28th 12:00 29th 3rd 09:00 12:00 16:00 13:00 18:00 21:00 

04:00 13:00 12:00 

13th 12:00 

14th 06:00 18:00 

15th 12:00 12:00 

12:00 12:00 

19th 

20th 12:00 12:00 

25th 

27th 06:00 12:00 08:00 

30th 1st 2nd 17:00 5th 15th 

10th 23:00 

20th 24th 00:00 


12 Nov 2006 08:57 


12 Nov 2006 12:20 


12 Nov 2006 13:10 


15 Nov 2006 00:01 


14 Nov 2006 23:24 


16 Nov 2006 01:55 

25500 

19 Nov 2006 10:10 

YES 

15000 

19 Nov 2006 10:30 

YES 


19 Nov 2006 12:20 

Diverted to 

19 Nov 2006 12:20 


19 Nov 2006 12:25 


19 Nov 2006 13:10 



your charts in. Type Example 11 Grouped by time.anb in the File Name box 




26 Nov 2006 09:07 


24 Nov 2006 25 Nov 07:36 2006 11:47 

Telephone Call Telephone Call Call 

24 Nov 24 Nov 2006 2006 26 09:04 Nov 17:03 2006 11:44 


28 Nov 2006 00:45 


27 Nov 28 2006 Nov 23:49 2006 06:45 


28 Nov 2006 16:28 


30 Nov 2006 07:39 01 Dec 2006 11:15 


29 Nov 2006 30 Nov 18:18 01 2006 Dec 08:18 2006 09:30 

25000 

03 Dec 2006 09:10 

YES 

3400 

03 Dec 2006 09:15 

YES 

Visually inspecting a chart and assigning attributes 

11250 

03 Dec 2006 09:37 

YES 

20000 

24 Dec 2006 12:24 

YES 

17750 

24 Dec 2006 12:44 

YES 

16000 

24 Dec 2006 12:52 

YES 

15500 

24 Dec 2006 13:09 

YES 

You can see that some of the telephone calls appear in the same groups as the 

transactions; these are the calls taking place just after each financial transaction. 

This may be significant and you decide to assign a Money Transfer attribute to the 

calls that appear to be associated with the financial transactions, and then delete 

links that do not appear to be associated. To do this: 

1. Select the telephone calls that appear to be in the same group as a series of 

financial transactions. 

2. With all of the links selected, right-click on one of them and, from the shortcut 

menu, select Combined Properties to display the Combined Properties 

dialog. 


30 Nov 2006 16:56 


30 Nov 2006 07:40 


03 Dec 2006 15:28 


03 Dec 2006 15:30 


03 Dec 2006 17:23 


03 Dec 04 2006 Dec 17:23 2006 12:09 


03 Dec 2006 18:01 


24 Dec 2006 20:00 


24 Dec 2006 24 Dec 18:30 24 Dec 2006 2006 20:30 21:00 


24 Dec 2006 16:53 


24 Dec 24 Dec 2006 2006 22:37 23:02 


24 Dec 2006 19:15 24 Dec 2006 21:20 22:00 



3. Select Attributes\Instances to display the Attribute Instances page: 

4. Click Add and add a Money Transfer attribute to each of the telephone calls. 

5. Click OK to close the Edit Chart Items dialog. 

6. Use Visual Search to find all of the links that do not have a Money Transfer 

attribute and delete them from the chart. 

Note: For information on how to do this, refer to How do I search a chart for 

items with a particular attribute? on page 299. 


9931-1291 

TownCorp UK 

7811-2371 

5104-2037 


2359-6357 

TownCorp UK 

4922-6321 


02073 871 117 

07786 162 534 


07787 563 412 

N/K 

07458 577 938 

KENT 

643 098 5784 

SMITHSON 

20000 

12 Nov 2006 07:48 

YES 

19000 

12 Nov 2006 07:57 

YES 

17000 

12 Nov 2006 08:04 

YES 


12 Nov 12 2006 Nov 08:01 2006 08:09 

YES YES 


12 Nov 2006 08:34 

YES 


12 Nov 2006 08:57 

YES 


12 Nov 2006 12:20 

YES 


12 Nov 12 2006 Nov 12:20 2006 12:58 

YES YES 


12 Nov 2006 12:25 

YES 



12 Nov 2006 13:10 

YES 

25500 

19 Nov 2006 10:10 

YES 

15000 

19 Nov 2006 10:30 

YES 


19 Nov 2006 12:20 

YES 

Diverted to 

19 Nov 2006 12:20 

YES 


19 Nov 2006 12:25 

YES 


19 Nov 2006 13:10 

YES 


Sunday 12th November 2006 Sunday 12th November 2006 15--20th November 2006 20--25th November 2006 25--30th November 2006 1--10th December 2006 Sunday 24th De 

05:00 06:00 07:00 07:40 08:00 09:00 10:30 

17th 12:00 18th 12:00 

12:00 22nd 23rd 12:00 

27th 12:00 28th 12:00 29th 12:00 16:00 20:00 2 

13:00 

12:00 12:00 

13th 12:00 

14th 12:00 12:00 

15th 12:00 16th 12:00 

19th 

20th 12:00 12:00 

21st 12:00 

24th 12:00 12:00 

25th 26th 12:00 12:00 

30th 1st 

2nd 17:00 

3rd 5th 15th 

10th 13:00 20th 24th 

18:00 

25000 

03 Dec 2006 09:10 

YES 

3400 

03 Dec 2006 09:15 

YES 

11250 

03 Dec 2006 09:37 

YES 


03 Dec 2006 15:28 

YES 


03 Dec 2006 15:30 

YES 


03 Dec 2006 17:23 

YES 


03 Dec 04 2006 Dec 17:23 2006 12:09 

YES YES 


03 Dec 2006 18:01 

YES 

20000 

24 Dec 2006 12:24 

YES 

17750 

24 Dec 2006 12:44 

YES 

16000 

24 Dec 2006 12:52 

YES 

15500 

24 Dec 2006 13:09 

YES 


24 Dec 2006 18:30 

YES 


24 Dec 2006 16:53 

YES 


24 Dec 2006 19:15 

YES 



your charts in. Type Example 11 Linked Transactions.anb in the File 



Creating Charts with Different Perspectives 

Creating Charts with Different Perspectives 11.4 

You can have both a timeline portion and an association portion on the same 

chart. This is particularly useful when you want to add additional information to a 

timeline chart concerning the subjects of theme lines. For example you may want 

to show the full details of telephone calls between a set of subscribers, and on the 

same chart, present what you know about the associations between those 

subscribers. 

How do I combine a timeline and an association chart? 

You have received further information about some of the accounts and telephone 

numbers on the chart showing their associations. Add this information to your 

current chart. To do this: 

1. Open the chart Example 11 association.anb. 

MOONSHADOW 

White 

Believed to crew on vessel 

Associates 

Used in station to 

call his supplier 


Owner 

Speedboat 

FARMER 

Heroin 

Steve WRIGHT 

Dutch 

Marc BAKER 

Associates 

Mr STEELE 

British 

Brothers-in-law 

02073 871 117 

Same person 

Director 


Crownsville 

UK 

Address 

Motorcycle 

2*9WF* 

Associates 

07786 162 534 


Courier on motorcycle 

Sam STEELE 

Paul SHARP 


4922-6321 


643 098 5784 

SMITHSON 

Associates 

Danny KENT 


2359-6357 

TownCorp UK 


7811-2371

Believed to crew on vessel 

Used in station to 

call his supplier 

FARMER 02073 871 117 

Heroin 

Owner 

Associates 

Associates 

Director 

Brothers-in-law 

2. From the Edit menu, select Copy Chart to copy the entire chart. 


Note: The Copy Chart command will only be available in the Edit menu if 

there is no selection on the chart. Click on the chart background to 

deselect any selected chart items. 

3. Close the chart Example 11 association.anb. 

4. Paste the contents of the chart Example 11 association.anb into your 

current chart (Example 11 Linked Transactions.anb). 

Note: If the contents of the Example 11 association chart is pasted on top of 

the existing chart items, move the association chart items so that they 

are displayed on the left of the chart and between the account theme 

lines and telephone theme lines. For further information on moving 

chart items, refer to the online help. Note that you may have to deselect 

the merged theme lines. 


6. Your chart should now look similar to that below (Example 11 

finished.anb): 

Saturday 11th November 2006 Saturday 11th November 2006 Saturday 11th November 2006 Sunday 12th November 2006 Sunday 12th November 2006 Sunday 12th November 2006 15--20th November 2006 20--25th November 2006 25--30th November 2006 1--10th December 2006 Sunday 24th De 

14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00 18:00 19:00 20:00 21:00 22:00 02:00 03:00 04:00 05:00 06:00 07:00 07:40 08:00 09:00 10:30 

17th 12:00 18th 12:00 

12:00 22nd 23rd 12:00 

27th 12:00 28th 12:00 29th 12:00 16:00 20:00 2 

23:00 

01:00 00:00 12:00 

13:00 

12:00 

13th 12:00 

14th 12:00 12:00 

15th 12:00 16th 12:00 

19th 

20th 12:00 2nd 12:00 

21st 12:00 

24th 12:00 12:00 

25th 26th 12:00 12:00 

30th 1st 

17:00 

3rd 5th 15th 

10th 13:00 20th 24th 

18:00 

MOONSHADOW 

White 

Steve WRIGHT 

Dutch 

Speedboat 

Marc BAKER 

Mr STEELE 

British 


Crownsville 

UK 

Same person 



Motorcycle 

2*9WF* 

Address 

Associates 

Courier on motorcycle 

9931-1291 

TownCorp UK 

7811-2371 

5104-2037 


19000 

12 Nov 2006 07:57 

YES 


Sam STEELE Danny KENT 

Paul SHARP 

Associates 

2359-6357 

TownCorp UK 

4922-6321 


02073 871 117 

07786 162 534 



12 Nov 12 2006 Nov 08:01 2006 08:09 

YES YES 

07787 563 412 

N/K 

07458 577 938 

KENT 

643 098 5784 

SMITHSON 

20000 

12 Nov 2006 07:48 

YES 

17000 

12 Nov 2006 08:04 

YES 


12 Nov 2006 08:34 

YES 


12 Nov 2006 08:57 

YES 


12 Nov 2006 12:20 

YES 


12 Nov 12 2006 Nov 12:20 2006 12:58 

YES YES 


12 Nov 2006 12:25 

YES 


12 Nov 2006 13:10 

YES 

7. Save and close your chart. 

25500 

19 Nov 2006 10:10 

YES 

15000 

19 Nov 2006 10:30 

YES 


19 Nov 2006 12:20 

YES 

Diverted to 

19 Nov 2006 12:20 

YES 


19 Nov 2006 12:25 

YES 


19 Nov 2006 13:10 

YES 

25000 

03 Dec 2006 09:10 

YES 

3400 

03 Dec 2006 09:15 

YES 

11250 

03 Dec 2006 09:37 

YES 


03 Dec 2006 17:23 

YES 


03 Dec 04 2006 Dec 17:23 2006 12:09 

YES YES 


03 Dec 2006 15:28 

YES 


03 Dec 2006 15:30 

YES 


03 Dec 2006 18:01 

YES 

20000 

24 Dec 2006 12:24 

YES 

17750 

24 Dec 2006 12:44 

YES 

16000 

24 Dec 2006 12:52 

YES 

15500 

24 Dec 2006 13:09 

YES 


24 Dec 2006 18:30 

YES 


24 Dec 2006 16:53 

YES 


24 Dec 2006 19:15 

YES 


Summary 

Summary 11.5 


• search for links within a date and time period 

• lay out your chart using different temporal layouts 

• create charts containing different perspectives 


Exploring Relationships 

12 

This chapter demonstrates how the analysis tools deal with date and time. 

Contents 



Finding Paths Between Chart Items 327 

Summary 340 


Introduction 



Scenario 


• finding linked chart items 

• finding paths between chart items in chronological sequence 



page 17. 






A chart has been created for you concerning several accounts and the 

transactions between them. Account number 9931-1291 has been identified as a 

key account, from which large amounts of money are flowing. 

You do not know where the money is flowing to. Using the analysis tools available 

in Analyst’s Notebook, you are going to analyze your chart to ascertain how this 

money is flowing and where it is flowing to. 


Chapter 12: Exploring Relationships 

Finding Linked Chart Items 12.2 

You can analyze the contents of a chart to find which chart items are linked to a 

selection using the Find Linked tool. You can choose different settings in a Find 

Linked operation depending on the sort of chart you are analyzing. 

If your chart contains items that have dates and times you can set the following 

options: 

• whether to find items forwards or backwards in time 

• where the time is taken from; from links, from entities, or both 

• whether to continue looking for items or to skip over items that do not have a 

date 

• the time period within which to search for linked items 

• the maximum time interval between consecutive items 

Note: For further information on the other settings in the Find Linked tool, refer to the 

online help. 



How do I find an item on a chart? 

A chart already exists showing a number of financial transactions. You want to find 

out if there are any transactions between a key account and other accounts on 

your chart. You want to delete accounts that have no links to the key account. To 

do this: 

1. Open the chart Example 12 initial.anb. To access the folder in which 




Account number 

9931-1291 


7811-2371 


5004-2037 


2359-6357 


5104-2037 


4922-6321 


5904-2057 

TownCorp 

UK 



US 



USA 


TownCorp 

UK 



UK 



USA 



USA 


20000 

12 Nov 2006 07:48 

19000 

12 Nov 2006 07:57 

17000 30000 

12 Nov 2006 19 Nov 08:04 2006 08:52 

2. From the File menu, select Save As to save this chart. Click OK on the Cover 


save your charts in. Type Example 12 finding relationships.anb in 


3. Press the F11 key to display the List Items dialog. 

4. Click the Entities tab to display the Entities page, if it is not already displayed. 


25500 

19 Nov 2006 10:10 

15000 

19 Nov 2006 10:30 

20000 15000 

23 Nov 2006 24 Nov 10:37 2006 09:00 

17750 

24 Nov 2006 12:00 

20000 

25 Nov 2006 10:00 

17750 

15500 

24 Nov 2006 10:54 25 Nov 2006 02:40 

18000 

26 Nov 2006 14:27 

10000 

18500 

27 Nov 2006 12:44 27 Nov 2006 17:32 

10000 

28 Nov 2006 09:15 

18500 

17000 14250 

27 Nov 2006 14:32 27 Nov 2006 27 Nov 19:22 2006 23:29 

20000 

28 Nov 2006 18:08 

15000 

29 Nov 2006 05:44 

18250 

29 Nov 2006 14:57 

18000 

29 Nov 2006 15:37 

15500 

30 Nov 2006 09:15 

25000 24000 

29 Nov 2006 30 Nov 19:12 2006 08:16 

15000 

01 Dec 2006 09:00 

15500 

01 Dec 2006 10:04 

20000 

01 Dec 2006 10:37 

25000 

03 Dec 2006 09:10 

20000 15340 

01 Dec 2006 03 10:44 Dec 2006 08:34 

3400 

03 Dec 2006 09:15 

11250 

03 Dec 2006 09:37 

18500 

07 Dec 2006 17:35 

15000 

08 Dec 2006 05:44 

20000 

09 Dec 2006 10:10 

13000 

09 Dec 2006 12:00 

11250 

10 Dec 2006 11:37 

20000 

11 Dec 2006 10:10 

13000 

12 Dec 2006 12:00 

17750 

15 Dec 2006 08:19 

17750 

20 Dec 2006 16:30 

20000 

24 Dec 2006 12:24 

17750 

24 Dec 2006 12:44 

3400 

24 Dec 2006 12:52 

15500 

24 Dec 2006 12:54


5. Reset the columns on the Entities page so that the default selection of columns 

is displayed in the correct order. To do this, click Columns to display the 

Columns dialog, and click the General tab to display the General page: 

6. Click Reset. 

7. Reset the columns on the Attributes and Analysis Attributes pages using the 

same method. 


The List Items dialog is displayed with the default selection of columns 

displayed in the correct order. 



9. In the Label column, select Account number 9931-1291 (you may need to 

resize the Label column to see all of the labels) and click OK to close the List 

Items dialog. 

Account 9931-1291 is selected on the chart. 


9931-1291 

10. To see where this item is located on your chart, click the Highlight toolbar 

button. Your chart should look similar to that below: 

11. Turn off the highlighting by clicking the Highlight toolbar again. 


How do I find chart items that are linked to a selection? 


Account number 9931-1291 is selected on your chart. You are interested in finding 

any other accounts and transactions on the chart that are linked to this account, 

however indirectly, but you are not interested in any of the other transactions or 

entities on the chart. Perform a Find Linked operation that finds just the accounts 

and transactions that are linked in any way to account number 9931-1291. To do 

this: 

1. With account number 9931-1291 still selected, from the Analysis menu, select 

Find Linked. This displays the Find Linked dialog. 

2. Click Reset to make sure the Find Linked settings are set to their default 

values. 

3. You are not interested in how indirectly items are linked to this account. In the 

Options area, turn off the Search Depth check box. 

4. You want the Find Linked operation to be performed on both entities and links. 

In the Result area, make sure that the Select Entities and Select Links check 

boxes are turned on. 

5. You want the Find Linked operation to find theme lines (which represent 

accounts), but not icons (which represent banks). To do this: 

a. In the Include Entities with Attribute area, from the drop-down list, select 

Representation. 




9931-1291 


7811-2371 


2359-6357 


5104-2037 


4922-6321 

20000 

12 Nov 2006 07:48 

19000 

12 Nov 2006 07:57 

17000 

12 Nov 2006 08:04 

b. From the Condition drop-down list, select equal to. 

c. In the Value box, type Theme Line. 

6. Click OK to close the Find Linked dialog. 

7. When the message is displayed that 4 entities and 36 links have been added to 


Each of the items found during this Find Linked operation are selected on the 

chart. 

8. You are not interested in any of the unselected chart items. From the Edit 

menu, select Invert Selection. This selects all of the chart items that are not 

linked to account number 9931-1291. 

9. Press the Delete key to remove these chart items. 


25500 

19 Nov 2006 10:10 

15000 

19 Nov 2006 10:30 

20000 15000 

23 Nov 2006 24 Nov 10:37 2006 09:00 

17750 

24 Nov 2006 12:00 

20000 

25 Nov 2006 10:00 

18000 

26 Nov 2006 14:27 

10000 

18500 

27 Nov 2006 12:44 27 Nov 2006 17:32 

10000 

28 Nov 2006 09:15 

20000 

28 Nov 2006 18:08 

15000 

29 Nov 2006 05:44 

18250 

29 Nov 2006 14:57 

18000 

29 Nov 2006 15:37 

15500 

30 Nov 2006 09:15 

15000 

01 Dec 2006 09:00 

15500 

01 Dec 2006 10:04 



20000 

01 Dec 2006 10:37 

25000 

03 Dec 2006 09:10 

3400 

03 Dec 2006 09:15 

11250 

03 Dec 2006 09:37 

18500 

07 Dec 2006 17:35 

15000 

08 Dec 2006 05:44 

20000 

09 Dec 2006 10:10 

13000 

09 Dec 2006 12:00 

11250 

10 Dec 2006 11:37 

20000 

11 Dec 2006 10:10 

13000 

12 Dec 2006 12:00 

17750 

20 Dec 2006 16:30 

20000 

24 Dec 2006 12:24 

17750 

24 Dec 2006 12:44 

3400 

24 Dec 2006 12:52 

15500 

24 Dec 2006 12:54


Finding Paths Between Chart Items 12.3 

You can use the Find Path tool to find paths between chart items. You can choose 

different settings in a Find Path operation depending on the sort of chart you are 

analyzing. 

There are two types of path you can search for: 

• shortest path 

• earliest path 

Shortest path The example chart below shows the shortest path: the path with the fewest links. 

Account 1 

Account 2 

Account 3 

Account 4 

Fewest links 

Earliest path The example chart below shows the earliest path: the path that finishes the 

soonest in time. 

Account 1 

Account 2 

Account 3 

Account 4 

Soonest finish 

Note: Although the examples in this chapter all use a Theme Line representation, finding 

links and paths based upon specified dates and times will work on association 

charts in exactly the same way if dates and times are included for the chart items. 


Finding Paths Between Chart Items 

How do I find the earliest path between two entities? 

You believe that Account number 4922-6321 is receiving money from Account 

number 9931-1291, but you do not know the routes that the money is taking to 

reach this account. Using the Find Path tool, find the earliest path between the two 

accounts. To do this: 

1. Select Account number 9931-1291 and Account number 4922-6321, in that 

order. 

Note: Account number 9931-1291 is the account from which the money is 

flowing and account number 4922-6321 is the account to which the 

money is flowing so the order in which you select them is important. 

2. From the Analysis menu, select Find Path to display the Find Path dialog. 

3. Click Reset to make sure the Find Path settings are set to their default values. 

4. You are only interested in the transactions that flowed from account number 

9931-1291 to account number 4922-6321. In the Options area, turn on the Use 

Link Directions check box and make sure that With Arrows is selected. 



5. You are only interested in the flow of transactions between the two accounts; 

you are not interested in any other accounts. In the Result area, make sure that 

the Select Links check box is turned on and that all of the other check boxes 

are turned off. 

6. You have specified the general settings for this Find Path operation; you now 

want to specify the date and time settings so that you can find the earliest path. 

Click the Date and Time tab to display the Date and Time page of the Find 

Path dialog. 

7. Turn on the Follow Date and Time check box and make sure that Forward is 

selected. 

8. In the Path Type area, select Earliest. 

9. In the Date and Time area, make sure that From Links is selected, as you are 

only interested in the date and time that the transactions took place. 



10. All of the transactions on the chart should have a date defined. If any 

transaction does not have a date defined you want the Find Path tool to stop 

the operation. To do this, make sure that Stop is selected in the If Date is 

Missing area. 

11. You suspect that all of the important transactions on the chart occur within an 

hour of the first transaction. You are not interested in any of the items that are 

not within an hour of the first transaction and therefore do not want Find Path to 

process them. Turn on the Next Item Must be Within check box and set this to 

be 1 Hour. 

12. Click OK to find the path between the two entities. 

13. When you receive the message that one path has been found, click OK. 

The earliest path, containing three transactions, is selected on your chart: 

Account number 9931-1291 


7811-2371 


2359-6357 


5104-2037 




20000 

12 Nov 2006 07:48 

19000 

12 Nov 2006 07:57 

17000 

12 Nov 2006 08:04

How do I add an attribute to links in the selection? 


Now that you have found the earliest path, you want to find the second and any 

subsequent paths. A useful way of eliminating paths that you have already found 

from the Find Path operation is to assign an attribute to it. Assign a Deal attribute to 

this path to show that it contains a complete transaction from account number 

9931-1291 to account number 4922-6321. To do this: 

1. With the results of the Find Path operation still selected, from the Analysis 

menu, select List Items. This displays the List Items dialog; click the Entities 

tab to display the Entities page: 

2. The two account entities on your chart are selected in the List Items dialog. 

Click Clear All to deselect these entities and click OK to close the List Items 

dialog. 

3. This should leave the three transactions, found during the Find Path operation, 

selected on your chart. 

4. Add instances of the Deal attribute class (value 1), from the Financial palette, to 

each of these links using the Attribute Bar. For information on how to do this, 

refer to How do I add an attribute instance using the Attribute Bar? on 

page 48. 



Each of the transactions found during the first Find Linked operation are displayed 

with an instance of the Deal attribute class: 



7811-2371 


2359-6357 


5104-2037 




20000 

12 Nov 2006 07:48 

Deal 1 

19000 

12 Nov 2006 07:57 

Deal 1 

17000 

12 Nov 2006 08:04 

Deal 1


How do I exclude items with attributes from a Find Path operation? 

You have now added instances of the Deal attribute class to each of the 

transactions that were selected as part of the first Find Path operation. To find the 

next path in time between the two accounts, you will need to exclude the results of 

this first Find Path operation. To do this: 

1. Select account number 9931-1291 and account number 4922-6321 in that 

order and, from the Analysis menu, select Find Path to display the Find Path 

dialog again. Click the General tab to display the General page: 

2. In the Include Links with Attribute area, select Deal from the drop-down list. 

3. From the Condition drop-down list, select is absent. Any link with a value for 

the Deal attribute class will not be included in the Find Linked operation. 

4. Click OK to find the next path between the two entities. 

5. Add an instance of the Deal attribute class (value 2) to each of the links found 

as a result of this second Find Linked operation. How to do this is described in 

How do I add an attribute to links in the selection? on page 331. 

6. Continue to perform Find Path operations using the same settings, adding 

instances of the Deal attribute class, with successive values, to each path, until 

no further paths are found. There should be four paths in total. 





7811-2371 


2359-6357 


5104-2037 


20000 

12 Nov 2006 07:48 

Deal 1 

19000 

12 Nov 2006 07:57 

Deal 1 

The links on your chart containing paths between account number 9931-1291 and 

account number 4922-6321 are all displayed with values for the Deal attribute 

class. 

17000 

12 Nov 2006 08:04 

Deal 1 

25500 

19 Nov 2006 10:10 

Deal 2 

15000 

19 Nov 2006 10:30 

Deal 2 

20000 15000 

23 Nov 2006 24 Nov 10:37 2006 09:00 

17750 

24 Nov 2006 12:00 

20000 

25 Nov 2006 10:00 

18000 

26 Nov 2006 14:27 

10000 

18500 

27 Nov 2006 12:44 27 Nov 2006 17:32 

10000 

28 Nov 2006 09:15 

20000 

28 Nov 2006 18:08 

15000 

29 Nov 2006 05:44 

18250 

29 Nov 2006 14:57 

18000 

29 Nov 2006 15:37 

15500 

30 Nov 2006 09:15 

15000 

01 Dec 2006 09:00 



15500 

01 Dec 2006 10:04 

20000 

01 Dec 2006 10:37 

25000 

03 Dec 2006 09:10 

Deal 3 

3400 

03 Dec 2006 09:15 

Deal 3 

11250 

03 Dec 2006 09:37 

18500 

07 Dec 2006 17:35 

Deal 3 

15000 

08 Dec 2006 05:44 

20000 

09 Dec 2006 10:10 

13000 

09 Dec 2006 12:00 

11250 

10 Dec 2006 11:37 

20000 

11 Dec 2006 10:10 

13000 

12 Dec 2006 12:00 

20000 

24 Dec 2006 12:24 

Deal 4 

17750 

20 Dec 2006 16:30 

17750 

24 Dec 2006 12:44 

Deal 4 

3400 

24 Dec 2006 12:52 

15500 

24 Dec 2006 12:54

How do I change the style or type of a link? 


You have found four paths showing the flow of money from account number 

9931-1291 to account number 4922-6321. You added instances of the Deal 

attribute class to each of these paths as you were performing the Find Path 

operation. Instead of using an attribute to show that a link is part of a path, you 

could change the link style of each of the links so that they stand out from the rest 

of the links on the chart. Change the link style of each link that is part of a path to 

be a Deal link type. To do this: 

1. Press the F11 key to open the List Items dialog and click the Links tab to 

display the Links page if it is not already displayed. 

2. Reset the columns on the Links page so that the default selection of columns is 

displayed in the correct order. For details of how to do this, see the online help. 

3. Add a column for the Deal attribute to the Links page. How to do this is 

described in How do I add columns to the List Items dialog? on page 188. 

4. Select all of the links on your chart that have a Deal attribute. How to do this is 

described in Sorting Within a Table on page 193. 

5. Click OK to select the links on the chart. 



6. Right-click on one of the selected links and, from the shortcut menu, select 

Combined Properties. Select Style\Links\Type to display the Type page of 

the Combined Properties dialog. 

7. Select the Deal link type and click OK to close the Edit Chart Items dialog. 




7811-2371 


2359-6357 


5104-2037 


20000 

12 Nov 2006 07:48 

Deal 1 

19000 

12 Nov 2006 07:57 

Deal 1 


Each of the links in your chart with a value for the Deal attribute are displayed as 

Deal links, the color of which is violet. This stands out from the rest of the links on 

the chart, making it easier to see at a glance the four paths in the chart between 

account number 9931-1291 and account number 4922-6321. Your chart should 

now look similar to that below (Example 12 finished.anb). It may not be 

apparent from the picture below which links are violet but you should be able to see 

them on the screen: 

17000 

12 Nov 2006 08:04 

Deal 1 

25500 

19 Nov 2006 10:10 

Deal 2 

15000 

19 Nov 2006 10:30 

Deal 2 

20000 15000 

23 Nov 2006 24 Nov 10:37 2006 09:00 

17750 

24 Nov 2006 12:00 

20000 

25 Nov 2006 10:00 

18000 

26 Nov 2006 14:27 

10000 

18500 

27 Nov 2006 12:44 27 Nov 2006 17:32 

10000 

28 Nov 2006 09:15 

20000 

28 Nov 2006 18:08 

15000 

29 Nov 2006 05:44 

18250 

29 Nov 2006 14:57 

18000 

29 Nov 2006 15:37 

15500 

30 Nov 2006 09:15 

15000 

01 Dec 2006 09:00 

15500 

01 Dec 2006 10:04 

20000 

01 Dec 2006 10:37 


25000 

03 Dec 2006 09:10 

Deal 3 

3400 

03 Dec 2006 09:15 

Deal 3 

11250 

03 Dec 2006 09:37 

18500 

07 Dec 2006 17:35 


Deal 3 

15000 

08 Dec 2006 05:44 

20000 

09 Dec 2006 10:10 

13000 

09 Dec 2006 12:00 

11250 

10 Dec 2006 11:37 

20000 

11 Dec 2006 10:10 

13000 

12 Dec 2006 12:00 

20000 

24 Dec 2006 12:24 

Deal 4 

17750 

20 Dec 2006 16:30 

17750 

24 Dec 2006 12:44 

Deal 4 

3400 

24 Dec 2006 12:52 

15500 

24 Dec 2006 12:54


How do I view a selection of chart items? 

Now that you have identified all the transactions of particular interest, you may 

want to inspect each link in turn on the chart. The Browse Bar can be used to 

manage a selection of items and view, or select them, as you wish. 

The purpose of the Browse Bar is to scroll the chart so that you can see chart 

items of interest. This is particularly useful when you have a selection of items that 

are spread across the chart. You initially set the list of chart items that you are 

interested in by selecting them on the chart. This list can be sorted according to the 

position of the items on the chart, either top to bottom or left to right. A chart item 

can be chosen individually from the list to view it, and you can step through the list, 

either forwards or backwards, to see each chart item in turn. To do this: 

Items in browse drop-down list 

1. Press the F11 key to display the List Items dialog. Sort the links by type to 

group all of the links of type Deal together. Select all of the Deal type links and 

click OK. All links of type Deal are selected on the chart. 

2. From the View menu, select Toolbars ➧ Browse Bar to display the Browse 

Bar. 

List options drop-down list 

Sort options drop-down list 

Browse to Previous 

Item button 

Select/Deselect 

Current Item button 

3. On the Browse Bar, from the List options drop-down list, select Replace List 

with Selection and click the Apply Command button. All of the selected items 

are added to the Items in browse drop-down list. 

4. Click the Lock/Unlock List button to make sure that no extra items can be 

added to the browse list. (To unlock the list, click the Lock/Unlock List button 

again.) 


Lock/Unlock List button 

Apply Command button 

Apply Command button 

Browse to Next Item 

button


5. From the Sort options drop-down list, select Sort List by Horizontal Position 

so that you can browse from left to right, and click the Apply Command button 

to the right of the Sort options drop-down list. 

6. Zoom in on your chart so that the link labels are easy to read. 

7. Click the Browse to Next Item button to center the chart on the first item in the 

list. Continue to click the Browse to Next Item button to center each member 

of the browse list in turn. 

As you are browsing your chart you may want to select other items. The 

Select/Deselect Current Item button adds the displayed item to the current 

selection. 

Close your chart. 


Summary 

Summary 12.4 


• find linked chart items 

• find paths between entities, including date and time aspects such as earliest 

path 


A 

Features used in the Examples 

This appendix contains tables showing where the Analyst’s Notebook features are 

demonstrated in the examples. 

It is possible to use these tables as a way of finding the examples which best 

illustrate specific features. 

Contents 

Analyst’s Notebook Features 342 


Analyst’s Notebook Features 0.1 

The ■ symbol indicates in which example the feature is first used and explained. 

The ● symbol indicates the feature is also used in the example. 

User Guide - Creating Charts 


User Guide - Customizing and 

Analyzing 

Feature 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

Attributes 

adding attribute entries to 

palettes 

analysis attributes 

attribute instances 

combining attribute classes 

defining attribute classes 

merge and paste rules 

showing attributes 

the Attribute Bar 

Background items 

Cards 

adding information to cards 

copying a card to another 

Windows application 

copying cards 

deleting cards 

Change representation 

of a timeline chart 

of an association chart 

Charts 

combining charts ■ ● 

creating a chart 

creating a chart from a 

template 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■

Appendix A: Features used in the Examples 

Feature 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

merging charts ■ ● 

opening a chart 

■ 

printing a chart ■ ● ● 

saving a chart 

Chart Properties 

■ 

default styles ■ ● 

Cover Sheet ■ ● 

Date and Time formats 

choosing a date and time 

format 

defining a date and time 

format 

Entity types 

default styles 

defining entity types 

Entity Representations 

box 

event frame 

icon 

labeling and uniquely 

identifying chart items 

OLE Object 

text block 

theme line 

Event frames 

adding event frames 

background text color 

display properties 


■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 


Analyzing 

■ 


■ 

■

Feature 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

duplicating event frames 

fill color 


■ 

Find Text ■ ● 

Find Path 

between two chart items 

in chronological sequence 

Find Linked ■ ● 

Find Matching Entities 

Grades 

Grid 

Icon 

about grades 

defining grades 

displaying 

grid settings 

enlarging icons 

Label 

merge and paste rules 

Layouts 

grouped by time layout 

grouped layout 

minimize crossed links 

ordered layout 

peacock layout 

print layout 

proportional layout 

theme line layout 


■ 

■ 

■ 


Analyzing 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■

Appendix A: Features used in the Examples 

Feature 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

Legend 

editing the legend 

populating the legend 

Line strengths ■ ● 

Links 

adding links between items ■ ● 

automatically linking theme 

lines and event frames 

■ 

■ ● 

connection styles ■ ● 

default styles 

defining link types 

duplicating links 

timed links 

List Items 

Navigating charts ■ ● 

OLE objects 

embedded OLE objects 

linked OLE objects 

opening an OLE object 

Ordering chart items 

Palettes 

adding chart items from 

palettes 

Print 

preparing a chart for 

printing 

printing the time bar and 

theme line names 

Report 


■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ ● 

■ 


Analyzing 

■ 

■ 


■ 

■ 

■ 

■

Feature 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

Show and Hide 

Selection Sets 

adding to selection sets 

defining 

intersecting and deleting 

restoring 

Snapshots 

Spelling checker 

Summary information 

Templates 

creating a new template 

creating a template from an 

existing chart 

customizing a template 

merging templates 

sharing templates 

Theme lines 

theme line segments 

theme line styles 

theme line wiring height 

Note: A few Analyst’s Notebook features are not used in the examples. Please refer to 

the online help for more information about these items. 


■ 

Time bar ■ ● ● ● 

Time zones 

Visual Search 

for a single entity 

for linked entities 


■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 


Analyzing 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ ● 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■

The i2 Semantic Approach 

B 

This chapter describes the concepts and principles that underpin the semantic 

functionality in i2 products with power2 built-in. It describes the main purpose of 

the i2 semantic approach, and concepts and guidelines that relate to the usage of 

the functionality. 

Contents 

Understanding the i2 Semantic Approach 348 

Semantic Capabilities of i2 Products 349 

Semantic Type Hierarchies 350 

What is Alignment? 354 

What are Custom Semantic Types? 358 

Guidelines for Assigning Semantic Types 361 


Appendix B: The i2 Semantic Approach 

Understanding the i2 Semantic Approach 0.1 

The use of semantics in the power2 products is key to their integration as a suite of 

i2 applications. Though each product addresses a discrete intelligence need, 

semantics provide a uniform meaning for data used across all the i2 products. This 

allows analysts to acquire data more conveniently and from additional sources. 

When this data is pulled into Analyst’s Notebook for example, you have access to 

intelligent searching, matching and analysis so you can produce better and more 

timely intelligence. 

To provide your charts and data sources with a meaning that can be understood by 

your power2 product, semantic types need to be assigned to the data. 

Semantic types are used to add the appropriate meaning to the data that can be 

shared between the power2 products. This meaningful data has a special 

significance when it is brought into Analyst’s Notebook for analysis. 

Semantic types are also used to extend the scope of analysis within a single data 

source. For example, in Analyst’s Workstation semantic types enable entity records 

stored in an iBase database to be built into a single cube for quantitative analysis. 

iBase 

Analyst’s Notebook 

People 

Male Judge 

Witness Felon 

TextChart 

Sources of Information 


Vehicles 

Motorcycle Car 

Truck Train 

iXa iXv iBridge


Semantic Capabilities of i2 Products 0.2 

The following diagram provides an overview of how the power2 products share 

data across the product suite, notes below each product highlight the additional 

capabilities gained by the use of semantic types. 

ChartExplorer 


Visualizations across charts Assign and assume semantic 

types, semantic searching, 

grouping, and matching 

iXv 

Visualizations of data 

provider data with 

semantic assignments 

iBase 

Storage of entities, links 

and properties with 


iXa 

Enterprise-wide 

delivery of data, with 


TextChart 

Visualizations from 

text with semantic 

assignments 

Data Miner 

Data for 

quantitative 

analysis 



Semantic Type Hierarchies 0.3 

The semantic types that are assigned to the data not only help to provide meaning 

for the data, but also ensure that it is aligned with similar data retrieved from any 

data source, or data that originates in any power2 product. 

Semantic types are assigned from a common library of semantic types called the 

i2 Semantic Type Library. It is also possible to create custom semantic types that 

are specializations of semantic types available in the i2 Semantic Type Library. 

These custom semantic types are stored in a custom library, which you can share 

between power2 products. 

There are three hierarchies of semantic types that can be assigned to your data: 

• Entity semantic types 

semantic types that can be assigned to entities or entity types 

• Link semantic types 

semantic types that can be assigned to links or link types 

• Property semantic types 

semantic types that can be assigned to attribute classes, fields in a database 

schema, or properties in a data record 

For example, the Car semantic type can be assigned to entities that are intended 

to represent vehicles such as Car, SUV, Taxi, and Limousine. 

How you assign semantic types differs between i2 products (and is explained in 

detail in the individual product’s online help): 

• For Analyst’s Notebook, semantic types are assigned to templates, and the 

user can also make assignments to specific entities and links. 

• For TextChart, assignments are to templates. 

• For iBase, iXa and iXv, semantic types are assigned to the database schema 

or data source. 

When you have assigned semantic types to your data, you can use i2’s matching 

technology to find potential matches between data, search your data for instances 

of a specific semantic type, and group data by semantic type for analysis as a 

group (for example, a list of all data that has been assigned the Person semantic 

type). 


Entity semantic types 


Entity semantic types can be assigned to entity types in a data source, in a 

database schema, on a chart, or to individual entities on a chart. They can be used 

to give a common meaning to entities. 

For example, the Person semantic type can be assigned to entity types such as 

Male, Judge, Witness and Felon. The semantic type assignment provides an extra 

layer of meaning to the data. It allows the application to understand that the Male, 

Judge, Witness and Felon entity types share real-world characteristics, and that 

they are distinct from entity types which depict offices and houses. 

The following diagram shows some semantic types and the entity types to which 

you would typically assign them. 

Property 

Briefcase Clothing 

Camera Jewelry 

Link semantic types 

Person 

Male Judge 

Witness Felon 

Mailing Address 

Office House 

Restaurant Shop 

Link semantic types can be assigned to link types, to individual links on a chart, or 

to link types in a data source or database schema, to provide those links with a 

common meaning. For example, you can assign the Meeting Between link 

semantic type to a link on a chart that is named ‘weekly meeting’. 



Property semantic types 

Properties convey data that describes the details of an entity or link. For example, 

the Date of Birth property semantic type could be assigned to the piece of data 

which is the date of birth of a person. The Nationality property semantic type could 

be assigned to the piece of data which records the nationality of a person. Property 

semantic types can be assigned to attribute classes in a chart, or to the fields of an 

entity or link type in a database schema or data source. 

Example of property semantic types and attribute classes 

In the following example, attributes have been added to entities on the chart. Each 

attribute class has a semantic type; by comparing the semantic information 

contained in the entities, Find Matching Entities in Analyst’s Notebook can suggest 

which items are intended to depict the same person. 

KENT David 

Blood Group: A B 

10 Jan 1967 

Daniel KANT 


XN 12873 34HH 

Attributes assigned to 

the Date of Birth 

property semantic type 

Example of property semantic types and fields in a data source 

In the schema of different data sources (whether iBase, iXa or iXv data sources), 

property semantic types are assigned to the relevant fields. In the following 

example, the Given Name field refers to the first name of a person. This field is 

assigned the Person First Name semantic type. The semantic type gives meaning 

to the data and helps products with power2 built-in understand what it is intended 

to depict. This is possible even though the format of that data may be different, for 

example, in different data sources the field could be called Forename, Name or 

First Name. 


Danny KENT 


XN 12873 34HH 

10 Jan 1967

Semantic 

Types 

Database 

fields 

Person First 

Name 

Person Last 

Name 


Date of Birth Nationality Gender 

Given Name Family Name Date of Birth Nationality Sex 

Alex KURTZ 03 Jan 1961 American Male 

Andre DOMENGES 18 Jul 1962 Mexican Male 

Anita JARVIS 26 Oct 1960 British Female 

Anita JONES 02 Apr 1968 British Female 

Anita NORRIS 17 Jun 1978 British Female 

Anne SMITHSON 29 May 1961 American Female 

Archie SWAINE 17 Mar 1952 British Male 

Arthur BARR 16 Aug 1952 British Male 

Aurthur JAMES 16 Aug 1963 British Male 

Aurthur MELDREW 16 Aug 1963 British Male 



What is Alignment? 0.4 

When you assign semantic types to your data, you are aligning that data with the 

meaning of the semantic types in the i2 Semantic Type Library. 

The main benefit of aligning data with semantic types is that it allows the power2 

products to interpret data in a uniform way, regardless of how it has been entered. 

For example, you may have three data sources containing different types of data, 

such as lists of felons, victims, and informants. 

Entity Types 

Felons Victims Informants 

Addresses Arrests Telephone 

Numbers 

Companies Phone 

Records 

In the example above when the data is placed on a chart, all the people recorded 

as felons will be represented by a Felon entity type. Similarly, the people recorded 

as informants will be represented by an Informant entity type. 


Crime 

Scenes


This data is assigned relevant semantic types in the schema of the data source. 

Felons, Victims and Informants are assigned the Person entity semantic type. 

Addresses are assigned the Mailing Address entity semantic type. The data will be 

aligned as shown in the following table. 

Entity 

Semantic 

Types 

Person Felons Victims Informants 

Mailing 

Address 

Within a data source, an entity type could have fields containing more information. 

For example, consider the fields for Felons, Victims and Informants. Common 

property semantic types that describe a Person entity are: 

• Person First Name 

• Person Last Name 

• Gender 

• Date of Birth 

Addresses Crime Scenes 

Phone Phone Records Phone Numbers 

Event 

Organization 

Arrests 

Companies 

These semantic types can be assigned to the fields in the data sources to align the 

data with the i2 Semantic Type Library, in the same way that the entity types were 

aligned. The following table shows these assignments. 



Property 

Semantic Types 

In the table above, the Person First Name property semantic type is assigned to 

the Forename, Name and First Name fields in the three data sources. Regardless 

of the name of the fields, power2 applications can understand how the data is to be 

interpreted. By assigning semantic types to the fields, the data in all three data 

sources is aligned to the meaning of the semantic type. This is referred to as 

horizontal alignment, as the data is aligned across the various data sources. 

Horizontal alignment also applies to single data sources, such as an iBase 

database, where felons, victims, and informants could be entity types within the 

data source. 


Felons Victims Informants 

Person First Name Forename Name First Name 

Person Last Name Surname Last Name 

Gender Male/Female M/F Sex 

Date of Birth Birth Date DOB Date of Birth 

Marital Status Marital Status Married 

Nationality 

Social Security Number SSN Soc 

Zip Code 

Phone Number 

Phone 

Number 

Nationality 

Zip Code 

Telephone 

Number

What is vertical alignment? 


The i2 Semantic Type Library structures semantic types into families of like 

semantic types, in a child/parent relationship. The structure of the semantic types 

is used to show that certain entities are related, just as they are in the real world. 

For example, cars, motorcycles and trucks can all be classified as vehicles, 

therefore the Bus, Car, Motorcycle and Truck semantic types belong to the Motor 

Vehicle family of semantic types. 

An entity that is assigned the Car semantic type is vertically aligned with an entity 

that is assigned the Motor Vehicle semantic type, because it is assigned a 

semantic type that is part of the Motor Vehicle family of semantic types. Vertical 

alignment is particularly useful for grouping, and searching for, similar real-world 

objects. For example: 

• The Semantic Path analysis attribute in Analyst’s Notebook uses vertical 

alignment to group similar real-world objects together for analysis 

• Queries with semantic conditions in iBase use vertical alignment to group 

similar real-world objects together for querying (in SQL Server databases only) 

Vertical alignment also applies to links and attribute classes or fields. 



What are Custom Semantic Types? 0.5 

A custom semantic type is a semantic type that you create for a specific 

classification, which is typically not catered for in the i2 Semantic Type Library. 

While the i2 Semantic Type Library has been developed to include the most 

common classifications of real-world items, you have to create a new semantic 

type for a specific sub-classification. For example, the Person semantic type is 

included in the library, but you have to create a custom semantic type for Pilot. See 

Defining custom semantic types on page 363, for general guidelines on creating 

and naming custom semantic types. 

You can create custom semantic types for use with entities, links, attribute classes 

or fields. 

When to create custom semantic types 

You may decide to create custom semantic types for a variety of reasons. 

For example, you have data on different kinds of sporting events. The library 

contains an Event entity semantic type, but it does not contain entity semantic 

types that would be appropriate to distinguish between different kinds of sporting 

events (for example, baseball game, rugby match, and so on.) To ensure that 

appropriate semantic types exist in the library so that different sporting events are 

distinct on charts or in your data source, you must define custom semantic types 

that are derived from the Event entity semantic type. 

If it is not necessary to distinguish between different specializations of an entity, 

then you can simply assign the appropriate generalized entity semantic type to 

your data. For example, suppose your chart or data source contains a list of people 

who have attended an annual convention. The library does not contain a 

Convention entity semantic type, but you can assign the Event entity semantic 

type because your chart or data source contains only one kind of event. 

You may want to create a custom property semantic type if you want to assign 

multiple values for the same property to a single entity or link. For example, 

suppose your data source contains a list of a person's bank accounts numbers, 

and you have decided to represent each bank account as a property on the entity, 

rather than use bank account entities with links to the person that owns them. 

Since a property semantic type can only be added once to each entity semantic 

type or link semantic type in a library, you can create specializations of the Account 

Number property semantic type so that each occurrence has a unique property 

semantic type assignment. 


Selecting the correct parent for a custom semantic type 


Choosing the correct semantic type to derive your new custom semantic type from 

is a critical decision because the custom semantic type inherits characteristics and 

behaviors from its parent. In the above sporting event example, it would be 

inappropriate to derive the custom semantic types from the Document entity 

semantic type, for example, because a sporting event is not a specialization of a 

document. 

Where are custom semantic types held? 

Initially, custom semantic types are not stored in the i2 Semantic Type Library but 

in your current template or database. To ensure that other users benefit from your 

custom semantic types, you can distribute them as a custom semantic type 

Library. These are stored in a custom file (extension .mtc), which can be loaded 

into the power2 application. 

Make sure that you load any custom files that are in use in your organization before 

deciding whether you need to create a custom semantic type. Each custom 

semantic type that is created has a unique internal identifier. Even though a 

colleague has a chart with a custom semantic type with the same name as in your 

chart, for example Military Jet, the data will not be aligned when the charts are 

merged because both custom semantic types are unique. Always establish 

whether your proposed custom semantic type will be unique in your organization, 

and then share the custom file within your organization so that users are assigning 

the same custom semantic type. 

Note: If you send your custom file to i2, your new additions will be considered for 

inclusion in a later version of the i2 Semantic Type Library. This means that the 

entire power2 community can be aligned with your data. power2 applications have 

a command to send the custom file to i2. See Sharing custom semantic types on 

page 364, for further advice. 

For information on changes to the i2 Semantic Type Library, see the release notes 

accompanying the library. There may also be additional information in the power2 

application’s online help. 



Semantic Types and Data Records 0.6 

Whereas Analyst’s Notebook uses semantic types to provide the real-world 

meaning for the entity types, link types and attribute classes that are added to a 

chart, data sources use semantic types to add meaning to each record and to the 

data in the fields of each record. When you choose to extract this data for charting 

in Analyst’s Notebook, it is transferred to Analyst’s Notebook in the form of a data 

record, which is held as part of the chart item. 

A data record has a unique identifier called a database key and a related semantic 

type. Linked to the key is a collection of data items derived from the record fields, 

known as properties. Each property is assigned a property semantic type, which is 

used to align the data with similar properties from other data sources. It provides 

meaning for the data when matching the data with other chart items. These 

semantic types are all assigned by the data source and cannot be changed within 

Analyst’s Notebook. 


This semantic type 

provides meaning for 

the data record, and 

helps to align this data 

record with other data 

records in the chart. 

These semantic types 

provide meaning for the 

property values, and 

help to align the values 

with other similar 

properties in other data 

records.


Guidelines for Assigning Semantic Types 0.7 

General guidelines 

This section provides guidelines to consider before assigning semantic types, or 

changing any existing semantic type assignments. It covers: 

• general semantic type assignments 

• guidelines for assigning custom semantic types 

• information on sharing custom semantic types 

These guidelines are useful irrespective of the product you use to assign the 

semantic types. 

The following are general guidelines to follow when you are choosing what 

semantic type to assign to your data. 

• Know your data source 

You must be familiar with your data source when assigning semantic types. 

The semantic types are assigned to add meaning to the data and allow it to be 

aligned for searching and matching. It is important not to distort the real 

meaning of the original data source; it will be far easier to assign semantic 

types if you know the intended meaning of the original data. 

• Look for an appropriate existing semantic type 

Before defining your own custom semantic type, always try to find an 

appropriate type within your organization’s library of available semantic types. 

This library will include both the types available in the i2 Semantic Type Library 

as well as any custom semantic types that you have loaded from a custom 

semantic type library. 

Using an existing semantic type maximizes the likelihood of alignment with 

data from other sources. A custom semantic type will only horizontally align if 

shared with other data sources. Tips for finding semantic types within the 

library are given in your power2 application’s online help. For more information 

about sharing custom semantic types, refer to Sharing custom semantic types 

on page 364. 



• Refer to the synonyms and description when assigning a semantic type 

When you are deciding if an existing semantic type is appropriate, always refer 

to the synonyms and description given to the semantic type. Some names can 

be interpreted in more than one way. The synonyms and description together 

provide a more definitive meaning. 

Note: It may also be useful to check the parent to ensure the more general 

semantic type is also applicable. If the semantic type found is not 

appropriate, it may also be worth looking at other semantic types in a 

similar area of the hierarchy in case another one is more appropriate. 

• Think about the use of semantic types 

When assigning semantic types, think about how they will be used, for example 

you may want to perform searches, find matching entities, and so on. The 

semantic types you assign should be clear and obvious. For example, if you 

assign the Classification Title property semantic type to a field in a database or 

to an attribute class called Document Type, the analyst may not think to use it. 

It would be better in this situation to define a custom semantic type called 

Document Type derived from the existing Classification Title semantic type. 

• Know the type of your data 

When assigning semantic types you should be aware that data can be one of 

three distinct types: 

— Identifying data 

This is data that directly identifies the item. For instance a Person entity 

may have a Person Full Name, or Social Security Number that is used to 

identify a person. 

— Related data 

There are a number of circumstances where the data properties of an entity 

include some that describe another, related, entity of the same type. For 

example a record about a company may include the name of its parent 

company. The most important aspect of this is that the related type is 

describing another entity of the same type. 

It would be reasonable to think of the parent company name as having an 

Organization Name property semantic type. However, if you were to assign 

this type, or a derivative of it, it would be used as part of the data identifying 

the company itself when company records are matched. For example, a 

company called Office UK whose parent company was called Business 

Office US would match happily with a company whose name is Business 

Office Inc whose parent is called Holding Company LLC. This is not the 

desired behavior. To handle this situation, there are types in the i2 

Semantic Type Library named Related. For instance, use the Related 

Organization Name semantic type for the parent company name. 


— Record metadata 

Defining custom semantic types 


This is informational data that is used to describe the data and not the item 

it describes. For example, you might have a database field labeled Entered 

by. In this instance, although the content will be people’s names, they 

should not be assigned the Person Full Name semantic type. Instead, if you 

need to assign a semantic type at all, you should define a custom semantic 

type derived from the abstract type that has the correct data type, for 

example Abstract Text. 

It may be that an appropriate semantic type is not available in the i2 Semantic Type 

Library. In this instance, you may need to define a custom semantic type to use. 

The following rules apply when defining custom semantic types: 

• Assign sensible names, synonyms and descriptions for custom semantic types 

When defining a custom semantic type, it is important you use a sensible name 

and provide appropriate synonyms. Names and synonyms are there to help 

others when finding and showing the information. Descriptions also provide 

valuable semantic meaning in addition to the name and synonyms. They also 

provide a useful reference when reusing the custom semantic type in another 

place within your data source, or when sharing custom semantic types for use 

in multiple data sources, particularly when others will be using it. 

• Define a custom semantic type derived from a sensible parent 

Think about the parent when defining a custom semantic type. For example, a 

custom property semantic type called Witness Name could be derived from the 

Abstract Text property semantic type, but it is more appropriate to derive it from 

the Person Full Name property semantic type. Be as specific as possible when 

thinking about the parent. Failing to derive a custom semantic type from the 

appropriate parent means that the expected behavior will not apply. 

• Deriving custom property semantic types from Abstract Flag 

There is a convention for the naming of custom property semantic types 

derived from the Abstract Flag property semantic type. When defining these 

types, the name should always start with a verb to provide a clear indication 

that the type is a flag. For example, if you are defining a property custom 

semantic type to indicate whether or not a person wears glasses, you might 

name it Wears Glasses. Typically these are questions to which the answer is 

yes or no. 



• Naming custom link semantic types 

There is also a convention for naming custom link semantic types. Use short 

statements that can be read along with the entity types at the end of the links. 

For example, naming a custom link semantic type Associate Of allows you to 

read the entity-link-entity combination as Person A associate of Person B. 

Avoid using the entity type names at the end of a link as part of the link type 

name. For example, avoid giving a link type that links a person to a vehicle the 

name Person-Vehicle. Instead use a name such as Is Registered Keeper Of, or 

Is Driver Of. Notice again the use of a verb to indicate that a link is directional, 

that is a person entity is the driver of a car and not vice versa. Symmetric (that 

is non-directional) links will not need a verb but should still be assigned a 

sensible name. 

• Property semantic types must be unique within an entity, link or data record 

You can only assign a property semantic type once within a given entity, link or 

data record. There are instances when you may want to assign the same 

semantic type to two or more properties within an entity, for example multiple 

aliases or multiple forename properties. In these cases, we advise you to 

define custom semantic types for these properties with _1, _2, _3, and so on, 

appended for each custom semantic type beyond the first. In some 

circumstances, the power2 products automatically define custom semantic 

types to avoid duplicating the semantic type names; in this instance they use 

this same naming convention. 

Sharing custom semantic types 

There is a mechanism within power2 products that allows you to share custom 

semantic types between data sources. If you are using multiple data sources, it is 

vital that you use this mechanism in order for semantics to work correctly. 

You share custom semantic types by exporting them to a custom semantic type 

library in the form of an .mtc file. 

This file can be loaded into other data sources so that the same custom semantic 

types can be assigned across all of the different data sources. This is the only way 

to use the same semantic types; it is not enough to just define a new type in your 

second data source and assign it the same name. Although their names will be the 

same, their unique identifiers will be different when the two data sources are 

combined. The end result will be a duplicate semantic type and the data cannot be 

aligned. 

For example, when assigning semantic types to data source A, you may find that 

you need to derive a custom semantic type for people giving evidence. You define 

a custom semantic type called Witness derived from the Person semantic type. 

You then move on to data source B and find that you also need the same Witness 

custom semantic type. If you define a new custom semantic type in the data 



source B called Witness, when both data sources are used together, two custom 

semantic types will exist; Witness and Witness_1. These two custom semantic 

types will not be considered the same and therefore when using (for example) 

Visual Search, the user will not be able to search on both at the same time. 




Glossary 

Abstract Semantic Type 

A notional semantic type associated with the real world meaning of the data. 

For example, an Abstract Number semantic type refers to a property that is 

reasoned about as a number. 

See also: i2 Semantic Type, Data Type, Semantic Type. 

Active Chart 

The chart on which you are currently working. 

Active Window 

The window which is currently displayed. It is identified by a check mark on 

the Window menu. When windows are tiled or cascaded, it is the window 

with the highlighted title bar. 

Alignment 

The positioning of text or objects with respect to each other or to a reference 

point, line, or object. For example, the alignment of lines of text can be: 

• left 

• right 

• center 

Analysis Attribute 

An attribute that is never displayed on a chart and is used solely to obtain 

information about chart items and their relationships to other items, for 

example, the number of links on an entity. Analysis attributes are created by 

Analyst's Notebook. They do not display on the chart but are useful for 

analysis. 


Glossary 

Ancestor 

An item at a higher level in a hierarchy that is the basis for the next level 

below in a hierarchy. 

In the example below, Property is the ancestor of Transport and Motor 

Vehicle. However, Transport is a child of Property because it is one level 

below. 

See also: Child, Descendent, Parent. 

Association Chart 

Chart showing relationships between entities to illustrate how they are 

interconnected, rather than describing a chronology of events. For example: 

associations between individuals; transactions between accounts; calls 

between telephone numbers. 

See also: Timeline Chart. 

Assumed Semantic Type 

The default semantic type that is used for an entity in the absence of a 

specific semantic type having been assigned. The assumed semantic type 

is based on the icon. For example, the icon Arson may have the assumed 

semantic type Crime. 

See also: i2 Semantic Type, Semantic Type. 


Attribute 

Glossary 

A piece of information that is associated with a chart item, such as date of 

birth or account number. It is represented by a symbol and/or value 

displayed with the chart item. 

Attribute Bar 

A special type of toolbar that allows you to add attributes to chart items and 

find chart items with a specific attribute value assigned to them. 

Attribute Class 

Characteristics of a specific attribute, including the type of its value, how it is 

displayed and the treatment of values when merged or pasted. 

Attribute Entry 

An attribute class together with a value. Attribute entries appear in palettes. 

Attribute Instance 

A single use of an attribute on a chart item. For an individual chart item there 

can be only one value for a particular attribute class. The display 

characteristics are controlled by the attribute class. 

Attribute Type 

An indication of the type of value which can be represented by an attribute. 

The four available types are Flag, Text, Number, and Time. 

Auto Save 

The ability of the application to save automatically a copy of your work on a 

regular basis. In the event of a power failure or abnormal closure of the 

application, the last automatically saved copy of your work is recovered 

when you restart the application. 

Auto Scroll 

The automatic vertical or horizontal movement across a window that occurs 

when you move or add a chart item close to the edge of the window. 

Automatic (or Auto) Attribute 

An attribute automatically created and assigned to chart items by the 

application. These attributes appear in the Attribute Classes page of the 

Chart Properties dialog with a yellow background. 

Back Up 

To copy data for safe keeping. For example, to copy a file onto a CD. 


Glossary 

Background 

A frozen layer of a chart behind other chart items forming a backdrop. In 

general, you cannot perform chart operations on chart items in the 

background. 

See also: Foreground. 

Background Item 

An item placed in the background of a chart. In general, you cannot perform 

chart operations on chart items in the background. 

Bitmap 

Box 

Card 

Case 

Chart 

A graphic composed of dots or pixels. A chart copied in this format can be 

pasted into a drawing program such as Microsoft Paint. 

An entity typically representing organizations or groups on the chart. It is 

often used to enclose other entities. 

A record of information attached to a chart item. 

A chart item can have zero, one or many cards. 

Descriptive text used to categorize a particular investigation. Case is one of 

the custom properties. 

A visual representation of real-world objects, such as organizations, people, 

events, or locations, and the relationships between them. 

Chart Item 

The representation of an entity or association between entities. 

Chart Item Label 

The text associated with a chart item. 

Chart Properties 

The chart definition of properties such as document summary, time zone, 

grid size, background color, and merge & paste rules. These properties are 

saved with the chart. 


Child 

Glossary 

An item that derives from the next level above in a hierarchy. A child is more 

specific than its parent. For example, the Cell Phone semantic type is a child 

of the Phone semantic type. 

Circle 

See also: Ancestor, Descendent, Parent. 

An entity that is used as an alternative to an icon to represent information on 

the chart. 

Clash 

The name given to a link and attribute to signify that an entity charted from a 

database conflicts with another entity already on the chart. 

Classification 

The text used to describe the confidentiality of the content of a chart or 

document. Classification is one of the custom properties. 

Clipboard 

A Microsoft Windows temporary store for data you have copied or cut from a 

Windows application. It is used to transfer information between charts or 

between applications. 

Cluster 

A group of entities that is more interconnected within the group than to other 

entities. 


Glossary 

Cluster Members 

The entities in a cluster and the links between entities in the same cluster. 

Column Separator 

A character that separates a column of data in a file or clipboard read by the 

Import Editor. This may be a tab, a space, or any specified character. 

Comment 

A record that you want the Importer to ignore. 

Connection 

The association between a pair of entities on the chart, represented by one 

or more links. 

Connection Style 

The way in which the number of links is represented in a connection. There 

are three connection styles: single directed multiple 

See also: Single Connection, Directed Connection, Multiple 

Connection. 

Controlling Item 

A chart item that defines the position of its date and time on the chart. A 

controlling item has a fully specified date and time and is also ordered. 

See also: Ordered Item, Dated and Timed Item, Free Item. 

Corner 

A small dot placed on a link to divide the link into straight-line segments. A 

corner allows you to bend a link to improve your chart appearance and 

prevent overlapping of items. 

Cover Sheet 

A page that allows you to view and edit the summary properties of a chart, 

such as title, subject and author, and custom properties, such as case or 

classification. 

See also: Custom Properties, Summary Properties. 


Custom Properties 

Glossary 

User-defined information about a chart and its contents, which is not 

covered in the summary properties. Custom Properties can be viewed and 

edited using the Cover Sheet, and printed in the header and footer of your 

chart. 

See also: Cover Sheet, Summary Properties, Case, Classification. 

Custom Semantic Type 

A semantic type that has been created in addition to those types in the i2 

Semantic Type Library. 

See also: Semantic Type, i2 Semantic Type. 

Custom Semantic Type Library 

A collection of semantic types that are not in the i2 Semantic Type Library, 

typically defined by someone in your organization. Custom semantic types 

are stored in an .mtc file. 

See also: i2 Semantic Type Library. 

Data Column 

A basic item of data manipulated by the Import Editor. The treatment of each 

column in a data file is defined by an Import Specification. 

Data Provider 

An organization providing or owning one or more data sources. 

See also: Data Source. 

Data Record 

A record that is attached to a chart item that contains information from a data 

source. 

Data Source 

A source of data accessible using an i2 product. It can come from a 

database, files or any software route that can deliver data. 

See also: Data Provider. 

Data Type 

A classification of a property semantic type to identify the particular kind of 

data the semantic type represents, such as a Number, Text, Date & Time, 

and Flag (Yes/No) value. 

See also: Abstract Semantic Type. 


Glossary 

Database Identity 

An identity, used by the application, to identify whether or not two entities on 

a chart that originate from the same database should be regarded as the 

same. 

Date and Time Attribute 

An attribute that can have a value of a date and time. 

Date Format 

The way that a date is represented for input and display. 

Dated and Timed Item 

A chart item with both a date and time. 

See also: Free Item, Ordered Item, Controlling Item. 

Default Style 

The style used for new items as they are added to the chart. 


Descendent 

Glossary 

An item at a lower level in a hierarchy that inherits its properties from 

something at a higher level. 

In the example below, Transport and Motor Vehicle are both descendents of 

Property. However, Transport is also a child of Property because it is one 

level below. 

See also: Ancestor, Child, Parent. 

Description 

A property of a chart item, providing a detailed explanation of the 

information represented by the chart item. 

Directed Connection 

A connection in which all links in the same direction are represented as one 

on the chart. The possible directions for the link lines are: 

• No direction 

• Entity A to Entity B 

• Entity B to Entity A 

• Both directions 

See also: Connection Style. 


Glossary 

Diverted Theme Line 

A theme line attached to an event frame such that when the event frame is 

moved, it maintains its vertical position with the event frame. 

Diverting Event Frame 

An event frame linked to a theme line that causes the theme line to change 

its vertical position. 

Docked [Window] 

A window, such as a toolbar, that is fixed in position relative to the 

application window. 

See also: Floating [Window]. 

Drag Handle 

A small square that appears at the edge or corner of an event frame, box, 

OLE object, circle or text block when you select it. A filled handle may be 

dragged to resize the item. 

Drop-down List 

Entity 

A list accessed from a dialog, from which you can select one or more items. 

A set of details held in the application about a real-world object such as a 

person, location, or bank account. 

Entity Semantic Type 

A semantic type that can be assigned only to an entity or entity type. 

See also: Semantic Type, i2 Semantic Type, Link Semantic Type, 

Property Semantic Type. 

Entity Type 

A category of like entities, for example organization, car, document, person 

or telephone. 

Event Frame 

A chart item representing a happening. 


External Data 

Information that has been retrieved via a connection to a data source. 

See also: Data Provider, Data Source. 

Fan Size 

The angle at which several links between two entities emerge from and 

travel into those entities. 

Flag Attribute 

An attribute that can have a value of YES or NO. 

Flat Look Mode 

Glossary 

A mode that affects the appearance of the toolbars when the application is 

run on earlier versions of Windows, such as Windows 2000. Flat look mode 

gives toolbars the appearance of being flat rather than raised. 

Floating [Window] 

A window, such as a toolbar, that can be freely moved within the application 

window. 

See also: Docked [Window]. 

Foreground 

The active part of a chart. You can perform all chart operations on items in 

the foreground. 

See also: Background. 

Free Item 

A chart item that has no order. You can move free items anywhere on the 

chart. 

See also: Dated and Timed Item, Ordered Item, Controlling Item. 

Grade 

A rating (typically a letter or number, for example A1) that can be used to 

indicate the accuracy of a piece of information and the reliability of the 

intelligence source. 

Grading System 

The use of a scale of code ratings for classifying the probability and 

reliability of intelligence for a document mark up, data or chart item; for 

example, the 4 x 4, or the 5 x 5 x 5 grading systems. 

See also: Grade. 


Glossary 

Grid 

A feature that allows you to align chart items more easily on a chart. A grid 

can be displayed as rows and columns of dots. 

i2 Semantic Type 

A semantic type that is included in the i2 Semantic Type Library. 

See also: Custom Semantic Type, Semantic Type, Semantic Type 

Library. 

i2 Semantic Type Library 

Icon 

A collection of entity, link, and property semantic types. The purpose is to 

share these semantic types. There are two kinds of semantic type library: 

the i2 Semantic Type Library, and a Custom Semantic Type Library. 

See also: Semantic Type Library, Semantic Type, Custom Semantic 

Type. 

A pictorial representation of an entity. 

Icon Shading 

The ability to adjust the coloring of chart items and entity types that use icon 

representations. 

Identity 

Import 

A short textual description of an entity used to uniquely identify it in a chart. 

To incorporate information from a text file or the clipboard into a chart using 

the Import Editor or Import Manager. 

Import Design 

The blueprint that forms the basis on which data items are imported into a 

chart using the Import Editor. 

See also: Import, Import Editor, Import Specification. 

Import Editor 

The tool used to create and edit an Import Specification. 

See also: Import, Import Manager, Import Specification. 


Import Manager 

The tool used to run and maintain Import Specifications. 

See also: Import, Import Editor, Import Specification. 

Import Specification 

Label 

A definition of how Analyst's Notebook interprets a data file or data in the 

clipboard. 

(1) A chart item, displayed as text, typically used for annotation. 

(2) The textual name of a chart item, which appears on the chart. 

Layout 

The automatic arrangement of chart items. 

Legend 

A key to the content of a chart. 

Legend Entry 

An item within a legend, for example an icon type and its description. 

Line Strength 

Glossary 

The display of a line represented by solid, dashed or dotted lines on the 

chart. Line strength is typically an indication of the quality of the information 

for a particular chart item. 

Line Style 

Link 

A combination of the strength, color and width of a line. This may apply to 

the border of an entity, a theme line or a link. 

An association between two entities. For example, an owner link between a 

person and a vehicle. 

Link Area 

The display area of an event frame that provides access to the links to 

diverted theme lines. 


Glossary 

Link Semantic Type 

A semantic type that can be assigned only to a link or link type. 

See also: Semantic Type, i2 Semantic Type, Entity Semantic Type, 

Property Semantic Type. 

Link Separation 

The distance between adjacent links in a connection. 

Link Type 

A category of similar links, for example Account Owner or Transaction. 

Local Template 

A template that is stored in your local template folder, typically on your 

computer's hard disk. 

See also: Template, Workgroup Template, Standard Template. 

Marker 

A small triangle placed in the time bar to indicate a controlling item. 

See also: Controlling Item. 

Menu Bar 

The horizontal bar across the top of the window which displays the menu 

headings. 

Mergable 

The name given to links to signify that an entity charted from a database 

could merge with two or more existing entities on the chart. 

Merge 

To combine two or more items into a single item. The merged item has 

properties (for example attributes and data records), which are an 

assemblage of the items that have merged. 

Metafile 

A picture file which may contain both bitmap and vector data. A chart may be 

pasted into another application as an OLE object or as a simple picture, 

depending on the settings in your Options dialog. 

Multiple Connection 

A connection in which individual links are represented as separate links. 

See also: Connection Style, Directed Connection, Single Connection. 


Multiple Undo 

The ability to reverse a sequence of user operations. 

See also: Redo, Undo. 

Number Attribute 

OLE 

An attribute containing a numeric value. 

Glossary 

The Microsoft Windows mechanism for transferring and sharing information 

between Windows-based applications. OLE stands for Object Linking and 

Embedding. 

OLE Embedding 

The incorporation of a copy of an OLE object within the chart. An embedded 

object is contained in the chart rather than referenced from it. 

See also: OLE Linking. 

OLE Linking 

A reference to an external source representing the content of an OLE object. 

See also: OLE Embedding. 

OLE Object 

An entity that has been created using another Windows-based application. 

Online Help 

Information about the program you are running, displayed in an extra 

window on your screen or as a pop-up window over the item you want help 

on. 

Option 

A setting that controls the behavior of the application. There are three types 

of option: application, chart and command. Application options apply 

throughout the application, for example which toolbars are displayed. Chart 

options are specific to a chart, for example grid spacing. 


Glossary 

Option [Button] 

One of a set of alternative settings on a dialog that can be selected. Its 

selection status may depend on the status of other options within the dialog. 

Ordered Item 

A chart item whose position is maintained within a sequence. The 

movement of an ordered item is restricted such that it cannot be dragged 

beyond neighboring ordered items. 

See also: Dated and Timed Item, Free Item, Controlling Item. 

Palette 

A container for entity types, link types, attribute classes and attribute entries. 

Palette Bar 

A window that displays the contents of a palette. 

Palette Pane 

Pan 

A single portion of a palette bar that can contain entity types or attribute 

entries. 

The vertical and horizontal movement across a window. 

Parameter 

A placeholder in a report specification, which is substituted for a specific 

value from the chart as the report is generated. 


Parent 

Glossary 

Something that is the basis for the next level below in a hierarchy. A parent is 

more specific than its child. 

For example, the Phone semantic type is a parent of the Cell Phone 

semantic type. 

See also: Ancestor, Child, Descendent. 

Paste Special 

Path 

To copy information from the Clipboard into a chart, while maintaining data 

such as OLE information. 

Specific route between two entities on a chart, which may include 

intermediate entities. 

Path Name 

Pin 

Pixel 

The full name of a file, including the hierarchy of folders in which it is located. 

A small circle attached to a chart item that is used to indicate whether an 

item is Ordered (filled circle) or Free (unfilled circle). The visibility of a pin is 

part of a chart item's style. 

A single point on the screen. Pixel is short for picture element. 


Glossary 

Plug-in 

An external software component that extends the functionality of the 

application. 

Property Semantic Type 

A semantic type that can be assigned only to an attribute class or to a 

property in a data record. 

See also: Semantic Type, i2 Semantic Type, Entity Semantic Type, Link 

Semantic Type. 

Proportional 

Rank 

A description of an area of chart in which the horizontal distances between 

items is in the same proportion to the time differences between them. 

The relative position of results in a list, arranged in order of how closely they 

match the search criteria. 

See also: Score. 

Record 

Redo 

The text between record separators consisting of one or more fields in a text 

file to be read by the Importer. A record typically represents two entities and 

a connecting link. 

To restore the last Undo operation performed by the application. 

See also: Undo. 

Reference Grid 

A grid that appears on a printed chart, allowing references to be made to the 

location of items. 

Regional Options 

A Windows control panel that controls how numbers and dates and times 

are displayed on your computer. 

Regular Expression 

A syntax that describes a pattern of characters. For example: address[0-9]* 

A regular expression provides an advanced method for searching for text 

patterns, such as optional characters, using the Find Text facility. 


Report 

Glossary 

A textual description, generated by the application, containing information 

about entities, links, attributes and cards on a chart. 

Reporter 

The facility in the application used to generate pre-defined reports. 

Representation 

The form in which an entity is represented on a chart; for example, icon, 

event frame or theme line. 

Reveal Hidden 

Score 

A viewing mode that makes hidden chart items visible. 

An absolute value, used in Smart Matching, to indicate the probability of two 

entities being the same real-world object. The values range from 1 to 9, 

where 1 indicates a weak probability, and 9 indicates a strong probability. 

See also: Rank. 

Scroll Bar 

A bar along the bottom or side of a window which allows you to move 

horizontally or vertically across that window. 

Segment 

Section of theme line. Segments can be Wiring Segments or Style 

Segments. 

See also: Wiring Segment, Style Segment. 

Selection Set 

A set of chart items that were originally identified by being selected, and 

which can be selected again easily. 

Semantic Matching 

The capability to compare two entities or links to determine the extent to 

which they may be related, or refer to the same object in the real world. 

Semantic matching applies various rules in making the comparisons. For 

example, it takes into account whether two items are of the same semantic 

type (such as Person) and that there can be spelling variations, for example 

Jim, James and Jimmy. Semantic matching can take these factors into 

account and provide a ranking for the similarity of items. 


Glossary 

Semantic Path 

The position of a semantic type in the i2 Semantic Type Library hierarchy. 

For example the path for the HTML Extract semantic type would be 

Entity\Annotation\HTML Extract as it includes the full path from the root 

semantic type down through the library hierarchy to the semantic type: 

See also: i2 Semantic Type Library. 

Semantic Type 

A category that defines the real-world meaning of the data and therefore 

how applications should interpret that data. 

For example, Person is a semantic type that could be assigned to entity 

types such as Male, Victim, and Witness. The semantic type allows the 

application to understand that each of those entity types are a different way 

of depicting people in the real world. 

The semantic types are organized into three hierarchies: 

• Entity semantic type 

• Link semantic type 

• Property semantic type 

See also: i2 Semantic Type, Entity Semantic Type, Link Semantic Type, 

Property Semantic Type, Semantic Matching. 

Semantic Type Library 

A collection of entity, link, and property semantic types. The purpose is to 

share these semantic types. There are two kinds of semantic type library: 

the i2 Semantic Type Library, and a Custom Semantic Type Library. 

See also: i2 Semantic Type Library, Custom Semantic Type Library. 


Semantics 

Glossary 

The way in which i2 products can analyze and manipulate data according to 

its real-world meaning. 

Single Connection 

A connection in which all the links are represented as a single link, 

preserving the direction. 

See also: Connection Style. 

Smart Matching 

To compare the information content of a pair of entities to determine if they 

are likely to represent the same real world item. The comparison uses 

semantic types to: 

• gauge how much reliance to place on a piece of information for the 

purposes of identifying the entity 

• ensure like information is processed appropriately 

• handle issues such as variants of names, spellings and phonetics 

The results of a comparison is a score as to how closely the information 

content matches. For example Person Name: John SMITH, e-mail address: 

j.smith@somewhere.net, matches Name: Jack, Last Name: SMITH and email 

address: j.smith@. 

Snapshot 

A view of a chart, preserving the position of chart items and display scale. 

Source Reference 

An identifier indicating the origin of the information such as a document 

reference number. 

Source Type 

A description of the information supplier such as Officer, Witness or Record. 

Standard Template 

The template used by the application when creating new charts. 

See also: Template, Workgroup Template, Local Template. 

Status Bar 

The bar at the base of the application window, which displays information 

such as the current action, or the status of a tool. 


Glossary 

Style 

Visual properties of a chart item. 

Style Segment 

A portion of a theme line between adjacent items associated with the theme 

line to which you can apply color and strength. 

See also: Wiring Segment. 

Summary Properties 

Standard information about a chart and its contents, which includes the title, 

subject, author, keywords and comments. Summary Properties can be 

viewed and edited using the Cover Sheet, and printed in the header and 

footer of your chart. 

See also: Cover Sheet, Custom Properties. 

Symbol 

A small image that can be used as part of the attribute display. 

Template 

A container for all the properties that are required to produce a new chart or 

workspace by the application. 

See also: Local Template, Workgroup Template, Standard Template. 

Terminator 

See Theme Line Terminator. 

Text Attribute 

An attribute containing a textual value. 

Text Block 

An entity represented on the chart as a rectangle with rounded corners 

within which the label is contained. 

Text Box 

An area of a dialog in which you can enter or edit text. 


Text File 

Glossary 

Any file containing unformatted text. A text file can be edited using Windows 

Notepad, or referenced within an Import Specification in order to visualize its 

contents. 

Theme Line 

An entity represented as a line with terminating symbols and an icon. Theme 

lines are often used to provide a common thread to events. 

See also: Timeline Chart. 

Theme Line Extent 

The distance between the beginning and end of a theme line. 

Theme Line Icon 

An image displayed on a theme line used to represent that theme line. 

Theme Line Terminator 

The symbol that is used at the beginning or end of a theme line. 

Theme Line Wiring 

Tick 

The display of the way in which a theme line diverts from the horizontal to 

pass through event frames and travel between event frames. 

A mark on the time bar indicating a specific time. 

Ticking Rate 

The frequency of ticks that appear on the time bar, which show the rate of 

time across a chart. 

Time Bar 

The display, using ticks and labels, of the time flow from left to right across 

the chart. 

Time Format 

The way that a time is represented for input and display. 


Glossary 

Timeline Chart 

A chart or portion of a chart showing a chronology of events over a period of 

time. For example, a series of meetings occurring over several days, a set of 

transactions occurring over a period of time. 

See also: Association Chart, Theme Line. 

Toolbar 

A set of buttons that allow you to carry out operations within the application. 

They provide shortcut ways of selecting commands. 

Toolbar Area 

Type 

The area below the menu bar in which toolbars can be docked. 

A means of classifying entities and links, for example account, car, and 

person. All entities and links have a type, which influences their appearance. 

Type Icon 

Undo 

The icon used to represent an entity type. Type icons appear in many 

representations of an entity, for example theme line, event frame, icon. 

To reverse the last operation performed by the application. 

User Palette 

A user defined palette containing entity types, link types, attribute classes 

and attribute entries. 

Vector 

Graphical data represented using lines. 

Visual Search 

A graphical search facility within Analyst's Notebook, which allows you to 

find entities and links according to their properties such as labels, types, 

attributes and interconnectivity. 

Watch 

An option to display how the Importer reads each record in the input as it 

updates the chart. 


Wiring Segment 

Glossary 

The length of theme line between adjacent diverting event frames linked to a 

theme line for which you can control the height of the theme line. 

See also: Style Segment. 

Workgroup Template 

A template which is stored in your workgroup template folder, typically 

somewhere on a network. 

See also: Template, Workgroup Template, Standard Template. 


Glossary 


Index 

A 

Adding 

See also Defining 

attribute entries 

to palettes 50, 116 

attribute instances 47, 331 

using the Attribute Bar 48 

background items 

OLE Objects 161 

watermarks 157 

buttons to toolbars 166 

columns 

in List Items dialog 188 

entities to charts 29 

legend entries 142 

to a selection set 283 

user palettes 96, 97 

Alignment 354 

horizontal 356 

vertical 357 

Analysis attributes 198, 200 

adding columns in List Items 

dialog 198 

day of week name 201 

entity links 199 

entity links from 199 

entity links to 200 

entity sum links 200 

using in List Items 199 


power2 features 349 

Assigning semantic types 

to attribute classes 44 

to entity types 27 

to link types 36 

Attribute Bar 

adding attribute instances 48 

Attribute classes 44 

combining 244, 245 

defining 38, 39 

editing 41 

properties 

behavior 38 

display 38 

name 38 

palettes 38 

symbol 38 

sorting in a palette 46 

types 38, 39 

date & time 39 

flag 39 

number 39 

text 39 

Attribute entries 38, 50 

adding to palettes 50 

defining 52 

duplicating 51 


Index 

Attribute instances 38 

adding 47, 331 

to a selection 313 

using the Attribute Bar 48 

Attributes 

See also Attribute classes, 

Attribute entries, Attribute 

instances 

adding 

to multiple chart items 53 

combining 244 

Find Path 

excluding items with attributes 

333 

hiding 129 

merge and paste rules 215, 216 

showing 129, 132 

Automatic attributes 38 

B 

Background items 157, 160 

making an item a background item 

162 

OLE Objects 161 

watermarks 157 

Browse Bar 338 

Buttons 

adding to toolbars 166 

C 

Capturing 

snapshots 167 

Cards 

merging 224 


Chart items 

hiding 128 

showing 128 

ChartExplorer 


Charts 

adding 

entities 29 

items on top of background 

items 162 

association 316 

combining 316 

creating 

from templates 71 

with different perspectives 

316 

printing 146, 153 

background colors 145 

borders 145 

choosing a printer 145 

page boundaries 145 

page numbers 145, 151 

page setup 145 

theme line names 145 

time bar 145 

time zones 88 

timeline 316 

Choosing 

printers 147 

Color 

entity types 21 

shading icons 137, 138 

Combining 

attribute classes 244, 245 

charts 316 

Conditions 

Visual Search 286 

Connection style 

directed 228 

links 229, 230 

single 228

Copying 

See also Duplicating 

from List Items 202 

Creating 

charts 

from templates 71 

with different perspectives 

316 

templates 57, 58 

from a chart 79, 80 

user palettes 116 

Custom Semantic Type Library 359, 

364 

Custom semantic types 358 


359, 364 

defining 363 

sharing 359, 364 

Customizing 

templates 109 

D 

Data Miner 


Data records 360 

Date & Time formats 

See also Time zones 

date 85 


time 86 

Default styles 

entities 89 

event frames 91 

links 89 

theme lines 89 

Defining 


attribute entries 52 

custom semantic types 363 

date & time formats 85, 87 

entity types 21, 22, 31 

from an existing chart 60 

in templates 64 

grades 65, 66 

line strengths 69 

link types 31, 32 


Deleting 

entity types 

from a palette 109 

legend entries 140 

link types 

from a template 111 

palettes 109, 119 


selection sets 292 

Dialogs 

resizing 184 

Displaying 

grid 

by default 84 

Time bar 92 

Duplicating 

See also Copying 

attribute entries 51 


link types 34 

Index 


Index 

E 

Earliest 

finding paths 327, 328 

Editing 

attribute classes 41 

legend 140 

deleting entries 140 

templates 80 

time Bar 

display 93 

Enlarging 

icons 135 

Entities 

adding to charts 29 

checking for similarities 220 

Find Matching 240 

Find Path 260 

earliest 328 

shortest 327 

hiding 266 

invert selection 266 

merging 

cards 224 

manually 223 

Smart Matching 240 

Entity semantic types 351 

Entity types 21 

adding to palettes 97 

defining 21, 22, 31 


deleting 

from a palette 109, 118 


ordering 29 

in palettes 99 

properties 

color 21 

icon 21 

name 21 

palettes 22 


removing 

from a palette 109, 118 

searching 


Event frames 

default styles 91 

Extents 

theme lines 

leftmost chart item 90 

rightmost chart item 90 

F 

Files 

.mtc 359, 364 

Find Linked 262, 264, 321, 322 

search depth 262, 290 

to selected items 325 

Find Matching Entities 236, 240 

duplicate chart items 236 

formatting differences 236 

matched sets 242 

merging 237, 242 


Find Path 259 

between entities 260 

earliest 327, 328 


333 

shortest 327 

Formats 

date & time 

date formats 85 

time formats 86

G 

Grades 


source type 65 

Grid 

displaying 112 

by default 84 

setting size 80, 83 

Grouped by time layout 306, 312 

Guidelines for assigning semantic 

types 361 

H 

Headers and footers 151 

Hiding 128 

attributes 129 

chart items 128 

reveal hidden 268 

entities 266 

Highlighter 254, 324 

Horizontal alignment 356 

I 

i2 TextChart 


iBase 


Icons 

enlarging 135 

resizing 135 

shading 137, 138 

Intersecting 


Invert Selection 266 

iXa 


iXv 

power2 features 348, 349 

L 

Index 

Labels 

merge and paste rules 211, 213 

append 211 

discard 212 

merge 211 

Layouts 269, 306 

grouped 269, 271 

grouped by time 306, 312 

ordered 307, 308 

peacock 270, 272 

proportional 307, 310 

theme line 204 

Leftmost 

theme lines 

extents 90 

Legend 

editing 140 

entries 

adding 142 

deleting 140 

Libraries 


359, 364 


Index 

Line strengths 

confirmed 69 

defining 69 

hypothesis 69 

ordering 69, 70 

unconfirmed 69 

Link semantic types 351 

Link types 



deleting 



properties 

color 31 

name 31 

palettes 31 

removing 


Linked 

finding linked chart items 262 

Links 

connection style 229, 230 

directed 228 

single 228 

merging 227 

styles 335 

Sum Numeric 227 

List Items 178, 180 

adding columns 188, 198 

analysis attributes 199 

day of week name 201 

entity links 199 

entity links from 199 

entity links to 200 

entity sum links 200 

copying to another application 

202 

removing columns 187 

repositioning columns 196 

resizing dialog 184 

sorting 


entities in tables 187 

links in tables 193 

Local templates 71 

M 

Merging 

attributes 

merge and paste rules 215, 

216 

entities 

cards 224 

labels 218 

merge and paste rules 211, 

213 

append 211 

discard 212 

merge 211 

links 227 

connection style 

directed 228 

single 228 

Sum Numeric Links 232 

manually 220 

entities 223 




Multiple chart items 

adding attributes 53 

O 

OLE Objects 

as a background item 161 

Opening 


Ordered layout 307, 308

Ordering 

See also Sorting 



line strengths 69, 70 

P 

Page boundaries 

viewing 153 

Page setup 148 

annotation 150 

layout 145 

margins 145, 149 

number of pages 145 

page orientation 145 

paper size 145 

Palettes 

adding 

attribute entries 50, 116 

entity types from other palettes 

97 

attribute classes 

properties 38 

deleting 109, 119 



entity types 

properties 22 

link types 

properties 31 

removing 109, 119 



searching 

Visual Search 


sorting 


Standard palette 96 

user palettes 96, 97 

creating 116 

Pasting 

labels 

merge and paste rules 211 

Index 

Paths 

finding 259 

between two entities 259, 

260 



333 

shortest 327 

power2 

products 348 

Presentations 

snapshots 164 

print 145 

Printers 

selecting 147 

Printing 145, 146 

charts 153 

choosing a printer 145, 147 

headers and footers 151 


page margins 149 

page setup 145, 148 

annotation 150 

background colors 145 

borders 145 

margins 149 

orientation 148 

page margins 145 

page number 151 

page numbers 145 

page orientation 145 

paper size 145 

placement 148 

printing theme line names 150 

printing time bar 145, 150 

scaling 148 

theme line names 145 

viewing page boundaries 153 


Index 

Properties 


behavior 38 

display 38 

name 38 

palettes 38 

symbol 38 

entity types 

color 21 

icon 21 

name 21 

link types 

color 31 

name 31 

palettes 31 

time bar 

interval band 92 

marker band 93 

tick band 93 

Property semantic types 352 

Proportional layout 307, 310 

R 

Removing 

See also Deleting 

columns 


entity types 

from a palette 109 

link types 


palettes 109, 119 


Repositioning 

columns 


Resizing 

icons 135 

List Items dialog 184 


Restoring 


snapshots 171 

Reveal Hidden 268 

Rightmost 

theme lines 

extents 90 

S 

Search Bar 252 

find all matches 254 

preview window 252, 255 

results table 252 

Searching 

Find Linked 262, 264 

search depth 262, 290 

Find Path 259 

between two entities 259 



333 

shortest 327 

highlighter 254 

List Items 178, 180 

Search Bar 252 

search bar preview window 252 

Visual Search 


adding to a selection 313 

entity types in palettes 284 

linked entities 278, 279 

Selection Sets 125 

adding to a selection 283 

clearing 295 

deleting 292 

intersecting 292 

restoring 126 

Semantic Type Library 26

Semantic types 22, 25, 31, 38, 350 

assigning 25 

assigning to attribute classes 44 

assigning to entity types 27 

assigning to link types 36 

custom types 358 

for attribute classes 25 

for entity types 25 

for link types 25 

guidelines for assigning 361 

Setting 

grid size 83 

Shading icons 137, 138 

Sharing 


Shortest 

finding paths 327 

Showing 128 

attributes 129, 132 



merging 242 

setup 241 

strong matches 240 

threshold slider 241 

weak matches 240 

Snapshots 164 

capturing 167, 169 

restoring 171 

viewing 171 

Sorting 

See also Ordering 

entities 


theme lines in a chart 204 

within a table 193 


Standard palette 96 

Standard template 71 

Styles 

links 335 

Sum Numeric Links 227, 232 

T 

Tables 

sorting 193 

Index 

Templates 

creating 57, 58 

from a chart 79, 80 

customizing 109 

defining 



deleting 

link types 111 

palettes 110 

flags 113 

local 71 

merging 113, 115 

opening 80, 82 

removing 

link types 111 

palettes 110 

sharing 101, 103 

Standard 71 

verifying 74, 101, 120 

workgroup 71 

workgroup templates 103 

Theme Line layout 204 

Theme lines 

default styles 89 

extents 

leftmost chart item 90 

rightmost chart item 90 

printing 150 


Index 

Time Bar 

printing 150 

properties 

interval band 92 

marker band 93 

tick band 93 

Time bar 

displaying 92 

editing the display 93 

Time zones 

of a chart 88 

Toolbars 

adding buttons 166 

attribute bar 48 

browse bar 338 

Types 


date & time 39 

flag 39 

number 39 

text 39 

U 

User palettes 

adding 96, 97 

removing 110 

V 

Verifying 

templates 74, 101, 120 

Vertical alignment 357 

Viewing 


snapshots 171 


Visual Search 299 


adding 

to a selection 313 

conditions 286 

links 287 

for items with a date & time 303 

linked entities 278, 279 

W 

Watermarks 157 

See also Background items 

Workgroup templates 71, 103 

Z 

Zones 

See also Time zones

www.i2group.com 

Part Number: 1312

I2 Analyst's Notebook 7 User Guide - ISS Africa -Investigation ...

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?